JP2020199059A - Game machine - Google Patents

Abstract

To provide a game machine capable of increasing a degree of freedom in design without sacrificing appearance of the game machine because of electronic components.SOLUTION: A game machine includes: an electronic component (for example, an LED board 303) provided so as to be visible from a player; a specific member (for example, a base member 301) that is provided around the electronic component and is formed in color similar to that of the electronic component; a light-transmitting member (for example, a cover member 302) that is a member having a light-transmitting property and allows a player to visually recognize the electronic component and the specific member through the member; and a specific light-transmitting member (for example, a cover plate 702A of a variable winning ball unit 700) that is a member having a light-transmitting property and is provided in a position different from that of the light-transmitting member. Transmittance (for example, XA%, XB%) for transmitting light entering the light-transmitting member (for example, the cover member 302) in a predetermined direction (for example, T direction) is lower than transmittance (for example, Y%) for transmitting light entering the specific light-transmitting member in the predetermined direction.SELECTED DRAWING: Figure 10-14

Description

The present invention relates to a game machine capable of playing a game.

Some pachinko game machines and slot machines, which are examples of game machines, are provided with electronic components such as a display means such as a liquid crystal display and a light emitting means such as an LED (light emitting diode).

As this type of game machine, for example, a game board and a display device arranged apart from the game board on the back side are provided, and an opaque frame member is provided between the game board and the display device to play a game. Some of them prevent the inside of the game machine from being exposed from the gap formed between the back surface of the board and the display unit of the display device (see, for example, Patent Document 1).

JP-A-2007-296205

In the game machine described in Patent Document 1, in order to prevent the appearance of the game machine from being spoiled by making the electronic parts such as the display means and the light emitting means visible to the player, these electronic parts are made of frame members. It is necessary to install it inside the game machine that is invisible to the player, but there is a problem that the degree of freedom in design cannot be increased because the arrangement position of the electronic component is limited.

The present invention has been made by paying attention to such a problem, and an object of the present invention is to provide a game machine capable of increasing the degree of freedom in design without spoiling the appearance of the game machine by electronic components.

The gaming machine according to claim 1 is
A gaming machine capable of playing (for example, a pachinko gaming machine 75SG001).
Electronic components (eg, LED substrates 303, 403, 603, 803) that are visible to the player and
Specific members (for example, base members 301, 401, 601, 801) provided around the electronic component and formed in a color similar to that of the electronic component, and
A translucent member (for example, a cover member 302, 402, 602, 802) which is a translucent member and is provided so that the player can visually see the electronic component and the specific member through the member.
A specific translucent member (for example, a cover plate 702A of the variable winning ball unit 700) which is a translucent member and is provided at a position different from the translucent member.
With
The transmittance (for example, XA%, XB%) that transmits the light that has entered the translucent member (for example, the cover member 302) in a predetermined direction (for example, the T direction) has entered the specific translucent member. It is lower than the transmittance (for example, Y%) that transmits light in the predetermined direction (see FIG. 10-14).
It is characterized by that.
According to this feature, even if the electronic components are arranged so as to be visible to the player, the translucency of the translucent member is lower than that of the specific translucent member, so that the electronic components are less noticeable. The degree of freedom can be increased.

In addition, the present invention may have only the invention-specific matters described in the claims of the present invention, or may have a configuration other than the invention-specific matters together with the invention-specific matters described in the claims of the present invention. It may have.

It is a front view of the pachinko gaming machine in this embodiment. It is a block diagram which shows various control boards and the like mounted on the pachinko game machine. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the game control main processing. It is a flowchart which shows an example of timer interrupt processing for game control. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a special symbol process process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the effect control main processing. It is a flowchart which shows an example of an effect control process process. It is a figure which shows the structural example of the effect control board which concerns on the feature part 91AK, 92AK. It is a figure which shows the structural example of the storage area which concerns on the characteristic part 91AK, 92AK. It is a figure which shows the determination example of the moving image data and a text display process table which concerns on a feature part 91AK, 92AK. It is a figure which shows the structural example of the text display process table which concerns on the feature part 91AK, 92AK. It is a figure which shows the text display control example which concerns on the feature part 91AK, 92AK. It is a figure which shows the structural example of the text display setting information which concerns on a feature part 91AK, 92AK. It is a figure which shows the text display example which concerns on the feature part 91AK, 92AK. It is a figure which shows the text display example which concerns on the feature part 91AK, 92AK. It is a figure which shows the text display example which concerns on the feature part 91AK, 92AK. It is a figure which shows the configuration example of the screen display which concerns on the feature part 01AK, 02AK. It is a figure which shows the drawing command for effect which concerns on the feature part 01AK, 02AK. It is a figure which shows the configuration example of the screen display which concerns on the feature part 01AK, 02AK. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the effect drawing composition processing which concerns on a feature part 01AK, 02AK. It is a figure which shows the execution example of the image processing which concerns on the feature part 01AK, 02AK. It is a figure which shows the image display example which concerns on the feature part 01AK, 02AK. It is a figure which shows the reach effect content and the drawing processing pattern which concerns on the feature part 01AK, 02AK. It is a figure which shows the determination example of the drawing processing pattern which concerns on the feature part 01AK, 02AK. It is a figure which shows the effect execution period which concerns on the feature part 01AK, 02AK. It is a figure which shows the production execution example which concerns on the feature part 01AK, 02AK. It is a figure which shows the production execution example which concerns on the feature part 01AK, 02AK. It is a figure which shows the production execution example which concerns on the feature part 01AK, 02AK. It is a figure which shows the production execution example which concerns on the feature part 01AK, 02AK. It is a front view which shows the pachinko game machine as a feature part 75SG. It is a block diagram which shows various control boards and the like mounted on the pachinko gaming machine as a feature part 75SG. It is a front view which shows the game board of the pachinko game machine as a feature part 75SG. 10-3 is a cross-sectional view taken along the line AA of FIG. 10-3. It is a front view which shows the light guide plate device. (A) is an enlarged front view showing a main part of the light guide plate device, (B) is a sectional view taken along line BB of (A), and (C) is an enlarged view showing a main part of (B). (A) is a front view showing the first effect unit, and (B) is a rear view. It is an exploded perspective view which shows the state which saw the structure of the 1st effect unit diagonally from the front. (A) is a sectional view taken along the line CC of FIG. 10-7 (A), (B) is a sectional view taken along the line DD of FIG. 10-7 (A), and (C) is an E-cross section of FIG. 10-7 (A). It is E sectional view. (A) is a front view showing a base member, (B) is a front view showing an LED substrate, and (C) is a front view showing a cover member. (A) is a front view showing the first effect unit with the cover member removed, and (B) is a front view showing the first effect unit with the cover member attached. It is an enlarged view which shows the main part of FIG. 10-11 (B). (A) is a front view showing a variable winning ball unit, and (B) is a sectional view taken along the line FF of (A). (A) and (B) are cross-sectional views showing a main part of the first effect unit, and (C) and (D) are cross-sectional views showing the main part of the variable winning ball unit. It is a figure for comparing the 1st production unit and the variable winning ball unit. It is a figure for demonstrating the similar color. (A) is a front view showing the second effect unit, and (B) is a front view showing the second effect unit with the cover member removed. (A) is a sectional view taken along the line GG of FIG. 10-17 (A), and FIG. 10B is a sectional view taken along the line HH of FIG. 10-17 (A). (A) is a diagram for explaining the boundary between the base member and the LED substrate, and (B) is a diagram showing the configuration of the second effect unit. (A) is a front view which shows the 3rd effect unit and the 4th effect unit. (A) is a sectional view taken along line II of FIG. 10-20, and (B) is a sectional view taken along line JJ of FIG. It is a KK sectional view of FIG. 10-20. It is explanatory drawing which shows the visual appearance state of the 3rd effect unit and the 4th effect unit. It is a figure which shows the structure of the 3rd effect unit and the 4th effect unit. It is a figure which shows the effect mode when the 3rd effect unit and the 4th effect unit emit light. (A) is a schematic front view showing a state in which the third effect unit is located at the origin position, and (B) is a schematic front view showing a state in which the third effect unit is located at the effect position.

A mode for carrying out the gaming machine according to the present invention will be described below with reference to the drawings.

(form)
The game machine of Form 1
A gaming machine capable of playing (for example, a pachinko gaming machine 75SG001).
Electronic components (eg, LED substrates 303, 403, 603, 803) that are visible to the player and
Specific members (for example, base members 301, 401, 601, 801) provided around the electronic component and formed in a color similar to that of the electronic component, and
A translucent member (for example, a cover member 302, 402, 602, 802) which is a translucent member and is provided so that the player can visually see the electronic component and the specific member through the member.
It is characterized by having.
According to this feature, even if the electronic components are arranged so as to be visible to the player, the electronic components are less noticeable due to the specific members of similar colors, so that the degree of freedom in design can be increased.

The gaming machine of the second embodiment is the gaming machine according to the first embodiment.
Predetermined electronic components (for example, first start port switch 22A, second start port switch 22B, solenoids 81, 82, etc.) provided so as to be difficult to see or invisible to the player,
A predetermined member (for example, a member for fixing the first start port switch 22A, the second start port switch 22B, the solenoids 81, 82, etc.) provided around the predetermined electronic component, and the like.
With
The predetermined member is characterized in that the color is not similar to that of the predetermined electronic component.
According to this feature, for a predetermined electronic component that is difficult or invisible to the player, a general-purpose product can be used without considering the balance with the predetermined member, so that the manufacturing cost can be reduced.

The gaming machine of the third form is the gaming machine according to the first or second form.
A display means (for example, an image display device 5) is provided.
The electronic component (for example, the LED substrate 303) is characterized in that it is provided at a position farther from the display means than the specific member (for example, the upper part of the base member 301).
According to this feature, the electronic component is inconspicuous because it is located away from the display means that the player pays attention to.

The gaming machine of the fourth form is the gaming machine according to any one of the first to third forms.
A protrusion (for example, a protrusion 3A) provided above the electronic component (for example, LED substrate 603,803) and projecting toward the player from the electronic component is provided.
The protruding portion is characterized in that it is larger than the electronic component.
According to this feature, the electronic component becomes a shadow of the protruding portion and becomes inconspicuous.

The gaming machine of the fifth embodiment is the gaming machine according to the fourth embodiment.
The electronic component (for example, LED substrate 603,803) and the specific member (for example, base member 601,801) are dark (for example, black) (variation example).
It is characterized by that.
According to this feature, the electronic component is easily mixed with the shadow of the protruding portion, so that it becomes less noticeable.

The gaming machine of the sixth embodiment is the gaming machine according to any one of the first to fifth aspects.
The specific member is characterized in that the color brightness or saturation is higher than that of the electronic component.
According to this feature, the specific member has higher visibility than the electronic component, so that the electronic component can be made relatively inconspicuous.

The gaming machine of the seventh embodiment is the gaming machine according to any one of the first to sixth embodiments.
The translucent member (for example, cover member 302) has a decorative pattern (for example, decorative pattern 331) formed so as to straddle the electronic component (for example, LED substrate 303) and the specific member (for example, base member 301). ) (See Fig. 10-12)
It is characterized by that.
According to this feature, even if the electronic components are arranged so as to be visible to the player, the decorative patterns make the electronic components inconspicuous, so that the degree of freedom in design can be increased.

The gaming machine of the eighth embodiment is the gaming machine according to any one of the first to seventh embodiments.
The electronic component (for example, LED board 303) is a circuit board.
The specific member (for example, the base member 301) has a decorative pattern (for example, decorative pattern 341) that shares at least a part of the form of the circuit pattern (for example, the printed wiring board 320) formed on the circuit board. It is provided (see Fig. 10-12).
It is characterized by that.
According to this feature, the circuit pattern formed on the circuit board becomes less noticeable.

The gaming machine of the ninth embodiment is the gaming machine according to the seventh or eighth aspect.
The specific member (for example, base member 301) has a predetermined region (for example, rear wall portions 313A to 313D) that can be visually recognized from the player side without passing through the light transmitting member (for example, cover member 302). ,
A predetermined decorative pattern (for example, decorative pattern 341) having the same or similar aspect as the decorative pattern (for example, decorative pattern 331) of the translucent member is provided in the predetermined area (see FIG. 10-12).
It is characterized by that.
According to this feature, it becomes difficult to understand that the specific member and the translucent member are different members.

The gaming machine of the tenth form is the gaming machine according to any one of the first to ninth forms.
A decorative portion (for example, a decorative portion 420) provided at a position corresponding to a boundary (for example, the boundary portion BD) between the electronic component (for example, the LED substrate 403) and the specific member (for example, the base member 401) is provided. (See Fig. 10-19)
It is characterized by that.
According to this feature, even if the electronic component is arranged so as to be visible to the player, the boundary between the electronic component and the specific member is obscured by the decorative portion, so that the electronic component becomes inconspicuous, so that the degree of freedom in design is increased. Can be enhanced.

The gaming machine of the eleventh form is the gaming machine of the tenth aspect.
The decorative part includes a plurality of decorative parts.
A plurality of predetermined decorative portions are provided at positions that do not correspond to the boundary between the electronic component and the specific member.
The plurality of decorative portions are characterized in that the number is larger than that of the plurality of predetermined decorative portions.
According to this feature, the boundary between the electronic component and the specific member is obscured by the plurality of decorative portions, so that the electronic component is less conspicuous.

The gaming machine of the 12th form is the gaming machine according to any one of the 1st to 11th forms.
The translucent member (for example, the cover member 402) corresponds to a boundary corresponding region (for example, the boundary portion BD) between the electronic component (for example, the LED substrate 403) and the specific member (for example, the base member 401). It has (for example, a convex portion 410) and a boundary non-corresponding region (for example, a region other than the convex portion 410) that does not correspond to the boundary between the electronic component and the specific member.
The translucency of the boundary-corresponding region is lower than that of the non-boundary-corresponding region.
According to this feature, it becomes difficult for the player to visually recognize the boundary between the electronic component and the specific member through the boundary corresponding area, so that the electronic component becomes inconspicuous.

The gaming machine of the thirteenth aspect is the gaming machine according to the eleventh or twelfth form.
A logotype (for example, the letter "V") is displayed on the decorative portion (for example, the decorative portion 420) (see FIG. 10-19).
It is characterized by that.
According to this feature, it becomes difficult for the player to pay attention to the logotype and be aware of the boundary between the electronic component and the specific member, so that the electronic component becomes less noticeable.

The gaming machine of the 14th form is the gaming machine according to any one of the 11th to 13th forms.
The electronic component (for example, LED substrate 403) includes a light emitting means (for example, a second effect LED 404A) capable of causing the decorative portion (for example, the decorative portion 420) to emit light (see FIG. 10-18).
It is characterized by that.
According to this feature, since the decorative portion is conspicuous due to light emission, the player is less likely to be aware of the boundary between the electronic component and the specific member, so that the electronic component is less conspicuous.

The game machine of the form 15 is the game machine according to the form 14.
The light emitting means (for example, the second effect LED 404A) is provided so that the decorative portion (for example, the decorative portion 420) can emit surface light (for example, the light from the second effect LED 404A is an inner lens). The entire front surface of the convex portion 410 including the decorative portion 420 emits surface light by being emitted from the entire front surface of the 405 substantially evenly forward and incident on the region corresponding to the convex portion 410.)
It is characterized by that.
According to this feature, since the decorative portion is conspicuous due to surface emission, the player is less likely to be aware of the boundary between the electronic component and the specific member, so that the electronic component is less conspicuous.

The gaming machine of the 16th form is the gaming machine according to any one of the 1st to 15th forms.
Around the electronic component (for example, LED substrate 803) and the specific member (for example, base member 801), an effect means (for example, a third effect unit 600) having higher visibility than the electronic component and the specific member is provided. Provided (see Fig. 10-20)
It is characterized by that.
According to this feature, even if the electronic components are arranged so as to be visible to the player, the visibility of the effect means is higher than the visibility of the electronic components, so that the electronic components are less noticeable, which increases the degree of freedom in design. be able to.

The gaming machine of the form 17 is the gaming machine according to the form 16.
The effect means (for example, the third effect unit 600) is provided on the player side (front side) of the electronic component (for example, the LED substrate 803) (see FIG. 10-22).
It is characterized by that.
According to this feature, the visibility of the effect means can be easily enhanced.

The gaming machine of the 18th form is the gaming machine according to the 16th or 17th form.
The effect unit (for example, the light emitting effect unit 630) provided so as to be visible to the player in the effect means (for example, the third effect unit 600) is larger than the electronic component (for example, the LED substrate 803) (FIG. 10). -20)
It is characterized by that.
According to this feature, the visibility of the effect means can be easily enhanced.

The gaming machine of the 19th form is the gaming machine according to any one of the 16th to 18th forms.
The effect unit (for example, the light emitting effect unit 630) provided so as to be visible to the player in the effect means (for example, the third effect unit 600) is more visible than the color of the electronic component (for example, the LED substrate 803). Is characterized by its high color.
According to this feature, the visibility of the effect means can be easily enhanced.

The gaming machine of the form 20 is the gaming machine according to any one of the forms 16 to 19.
The effect means (for example, the third effect unit 600) has light emitting means (for example, LEDs 604A and 604B for the third effect) capable of irradiating light toward the player side (see FIG. 10-21 (A)).
It is characterized by that.
According to this feature, the visibility of the effect means can be easily enhanced.

The gaming machine of the 21st form is the gaming machine according to any one of the 1st to 20th forms.
A specific translucent member (for example, a cover plate 702A of the variable winning ball unit 700) which is a translucent member and is provided at a position different from the translucent member is further provided.
The transmittance (for example, XA%, XB%) that transmits the light that has entered the translucent member (for example, the cover member 302) in a predetermined direction (for example, the T direction) has entered the specific translucent member. It is lower than the transmittance (for example, Y%) that transmits light in the predetermined direction (see FIG. 10-14).
It is characterized by that.
According to this feature, even if the electronic components are arranged so as to be visible to the player, the translucency of the translucent member is lower than that of the specific translucent member, so that the electronic components are less noticeable. The degree of freedom can be increased.

The game machine of the form 22 is the game machine according to the form 21.
The plate thickness of the translucent member (for example, the front-rear dimensions L1A and L1B of the cover member 302) is thicker than the plate thickness of the specific translucent member (for example, the front-rear dimension L2 of the cover plate 702A) (see FIG. 10-14). )
It is characterized by that.
According to this feature, the translucency of the translucent member is lowered, so that the electronic component becomes inconspicuous.

The gaming machine of the form 23 is the gaming machine according to any one of the forms 1 to 22.
The translucent member (for example, the cover member 302) is colored in a predetermined color.
The predetermined color is characterized in that it is a similar color to the electronic component (for example, LED substrate 303) and the specific member (for example, base member 301).
According to this feature, the translucent member is assimilated with the electronic component or the specific member, so that the electronic component becomes inconspicuous.

(Basic explanation)
First, the basic configuration and control of the pachinko gaming machine 1 (also the configuration and control of a general pachinko gaming machine) will be described.

(Configuration of pachinko gaming machine 1 etc.)
FIG. 1 is a front view of the pachinko gaming machine 1, showing an arrangement layout of main members. The pachinko gaming machine (gaming machine) 1 is roughly classified into a gaming board (gauge board) 2 constituting the game board surface and a game machine frame (underframe) 3 for supporting and fixing the game board 2. A game area is formed on the game board 2, and a game ball as a game medium is launched from a predetermined ball launching device and is driven into the game area.

A variable display (also referred to as a special figure game) of a special symbol (also referred to as a special figure) as a plurality of types of special identification information is performed at a predetermined position of the game board 2 (in the example shown in FIG. 1, the lower left of the game area). A first special symbol display device 4A and a second special symbol display device 4B are provided. Each of these consists of 7-segment LEDs and the like. The special symbol is represented by a number indicating "0" to "9" or a lighting pattern such as "-". The special symbol may include a pattern in which all the LEDs are turned off.

The "variable display" of the special symbol is, for example, to display a plurality of types of special symbols in a variable manner (the same applies to other symbols described later). Fluctuations include update display of a plurality of symbols, scroll display of a plurality of symbols, deformation of one or more symbols, enlargement / reduction of one or more symbols, and the like. When the special symbol or the ordinary symbol described later is changed, a plurality of types of special symbols or ordinary symbols are updated and displayed. In the variation of the decorative symbol described later, a plurality of types of decorative symbols are scrolled or updated, and one or more decorative symbols are deformed or enlarged / reduced. The variation also includes a mode in which a certain symbol is blinked and displayed. At the end of the variable display, a predetermined special symbol is stopped (also referred to as derivation or derivation display) as a display result (the same applies to the variable display of other symbols described later). In addition, the variable display may be expressed as a variable display or a variable display.

The special symbol variably displayed on the first special symbol display device 4A is also referred to as a "first special symbol", and the special symbol variably displayed on the second special symbol display device 4B is also referred to as a "second special symbol". Further, the special figure game using the first special figure is also referred to as a "first special figure game", and the special figure game using the second special figure is also referred to as a "second special figure game". It should be noted that there may be one type of special symbol display device that performs variable display of the special symbol.

An image display device 5 is provided near the center of the game area on the game board 2. The image display device 5 is composed of, for example, an LCD (liquid crystal display), an organic EL (Electro Luminescence), or the like, and displays various effects images. The image display device 5 may be composed of a projector and a screen. Various effects images are displayed on the image display device 5.

For example, on the screen of the image display device 5, a decorative symbol (a symbol indicating a number or the like) as a plurality of types of decorative identification information different from the special symbol is synchronized with the first special figure game or the second special figure game. Is variable display. Here, in synchronization with the first special figure game or the second special figure game, the decorative symbols are variably displayed (for example, up and down) in the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R of "left", "middle", and "right". Direction scroll display and update display). The special figure game and the variable display of the decorative pattern that are executed in synchronization are also collectively referred to as simply variable display.

On the screen of the image display device 5, a display area for displaying a hold display corresponding to the variable display in which execution is suspended or an active display corresponding to the variable display being executed may be provided. Hold display and active display are also collectively referred to as variable display compatible display corresponding to variable display.

The number of variable displays on hold is also called the number of stored items on hold. The number of reserved storages corresponding to the first special figure game is also referred to as the first reserved storage number, and the number of reserved storages corresponding to the second special figure game is also referred to as the second reserved storage number. Further, the total of the first reserved storage number and the second reserved storage number is also referred to as a total reserved storage number.

Further, at a predetermined position of the game board 2 (in the example shown in FIG. 1, the lower left of the game area), a first hold indicator 25A and a second hold indicator 25B configured to include a plurality of LEDs are provided. The first hold indicator 25A displays the first hold storage number according to the number of LEDs lit, and the second hold indicator 25B displays the second hold storage number according to the number of LEDs lit.

Below the image display device 5, a winning ball device 6A and a variable winning ball device 6B are provided.

The winning ball device 6A forms a first starting winning opening that is always kept in a constant open state in which a game ball can enter by a predetermined ball receiving member, for example. When a game ball enters the first start winning opening, a predetermined number (for example, three) of prize balls may be paid out and the first special figure game may be started.

The variable winning ball device 6B (ordinary electric accessory) forms a second starting winning opening that is changed between a closed state and an open state by a solenoid 81 (see FIG. 2). The variable winning ball device 6B includes, for example, a starting winning opening door that is opened and closed by a solenoid 81, and when the solenoid 81 is in the off state, the starting winning opening door is in the closed position, so that the second starting winning opening is used. It is in a closed state where the game ball does not enter (also referred to as the second start winning opening is in a closed state). On the other hand, the variable winning ball device 6B is in an open state in which the game ball can enter the second starting winning opening because the starting winning opening door is in the open position when the solenoid 81 is in the on state (second). It is also said that the starting winning opening is open.) When a game ball enters the second start winning opening, a predetermined number (for example, three) of prize balls can be paid out and the second special figure game can be started. The variable-sweep wing device 6B may be any device that changes between a closed state and an open state, and is not limited to one provided with an electric tulip-type accessory having a pair of movable wing pieces.

At predetermined positions of the game board 2 (in the example shown in FIG. 1, four locations on the lower left and right sides of the game area), general winning openings 10 are provided, which are always kept in a constant open state by a predetermined ball receiving member. In this case, when entering any of the general winning openings 10, a predetermined number (for example, 10) of game balls are paid out as prize balls.

Below the winning ball device 6A and the variable winning ball device 6B, a special variable winning ball device 7 having a large winning opening is provided. The special variable winning ball device 7 includes a large winning opening door that is opened and closed by a solenoid 82 (see FIG. 2), and has a large winning opening as a specific area that changes between an open state and a closed state depending on the large winning opening door. Form.

As an example, in the special variable winning ball device 7, when the solenoid 82 for the big winning door (for special electric accessory) is off, the big winning door closes the big winning door and the game ball is large. You will not be able to enter (pass) the winning opening. On the other hand, in the special variable winning ball device 7, when the solenoid 82 for the large winning opening door is on, the large winning opening door opens the large winning opening, and the game ball can easily enter the large winning opening. Become.

When a game ball enters the large prize opening, a predetermined number (for example, 14) of game balls are paid out as prize balls. When a game ball enters the large winning opening, more prize balls are paid out than when the game ball enters, for example, the first starting winning opening, the second starting winning opening, and the general winning opening 10.

The entry of a game ball into each winning opening including the general winning opening 10 is also referred to as "winning". In particular, winning a prize at the starting opening (first starting winning opening, second starting winning opening) is also referred to as a starting winning.

A normal symbol display 20 is provided at a predetermined position of the game board 2 (in the example shown in FIG. 1, the lower left of the game area). As an example, the ordinary symbol display 20 is composed of 7-segment LEDs and the like, and performs variable display of the ordinary symbol as a plurality of types of ordinary identification information different from the special symbol. Ordinary symbols are represented by numbers indicating "0" to "9" and lighting patterns such as "-". The normal symbol may include a pattern in which all the LEDs are turned off. Such a variable display of a normal pattern is also called a normal pattern game.

On the right side of the image display device 5, a passing gate 41 through which a game ball can pass is provided. Based on the fact that the game ball has passed through the passing gate 41, the normal drawing game is executed.

Below the normal symbol display 20, a normal symbol hold display 25C is provided. The normal figure hold indicator 25C is configured to include, for example, four LEDs, and displays the number of normal figure hold storages, which is the number of normal figure games whose execution is held, by the number of LEDs lit.

In addition to the above configuration, the surface of the game board 2 is provided with a windmill that changes the flow direction and speed of the game ball and a large number of obstacle nails. At the bottom of the game area, there is an out opening for taking in a game ball that has not entered any of the winning openings.

Speakers 8L and 8R for reproducing and outputting sound effects and the like are provided at the upper left and right positions of the game machine frame 3, and game effect lamps 9 for game effects are further provided around the game area. ing. The game effect lamp 9 is configured to include an LED.

A movable body 32 that operates according to the effect is provided at a predetermined position (not shown in FIG. 1) of the game board 2.

At the lower right position of the game machine frame 3, a ball striking operation handle (operation knob) 30 operated by a player or the like to launch the game ball toward the game area by the striking ball launching device is provided.

At a predetermined position of the game machine frame 3 below the game area, the game balls paid out as prize balls and the game balls rented by the predetermined ball lending machine are held (stored) so as to be able to be supplied to the hitting ball launching device. ) A hit ball supply plate (upper plate) is provided. Below the upper plate, a hit ball supply plate (lower plate) is provided, in which prize balls are paid out when the upper plate is full.

A stick controller 31A that can be gripped and tilted by the player is attached to a predetermined position of the game machine frame 3 below the game area. The stick controller 31A is provided with a trigger button that can be pressed and operated by the player. The operation on the stick controller 31A is detected by the controller sensor unit 35A (see FIG. 2).

A push button 31B is provided at a predetermined position of the gaming machine frame 3 below the gaming area so that the player can perform a predetermined instruction operation by a pressing operation or the like. The operation on the push button 31B is detected by the push sensor 35B (see FIG. 2).

In the pachinko gaming machine 1, a stick controller 31A and a push button 31B are provided as detection means for detecting the movement (operation, etc.) of the player, but detection means other than these may be provided.

(Outline of the progress of the game)
The game ball is launched toward the game area by the rotation operation of the pachinko game machine 1 by the player on the ball striking operation handle 30. When the game ball passes through the passing gate 41, the normal symbol game by the normal symbol display 20 is started. In addition, when the game ball passes through the passing gate 41 during the period during which the previous normal drawing game is being executed (when the game ball has passed through the passing gate 41 but the normal drawing game based on the passage cannot be executed immediately). , The game based on the passage is suspended up to a predetermined upper limit (for example, 4).

In this normal symbol game, if a specific normal symbol (design per normal symbol) is stopped and displayed, the display result of the normal symbol becomes "per normal symbol". On the other hand, if a normal symbol other than a normal symbol (a common symbol lost symbol) is stopped and displayed as a confirmed normal symbol, the display result of the normal symbol becomes "normal symbol lost". When it becomes "per normal drawing", the opening control is performed so that the variable winning ball device 6B is opened for a predetermined period (the second starting winning opening is opened).

When the game ball enters the first starting winning opening formed in the winning ball device 6A, the first special symbol game by the first special symbol display device 4A is started.

When the game ball enters the second starting winning opening formed in the variable winning ball device 6B, the second special symbol game by the second special symbol display device 4B is started.

In addition, when the game ball enters (wins) the start winning opening during the period during which the special figure game is being executed or during the period controlled by the big hit game state or the small hit game state described later (the start prize has occurred). If the special figure game based on the start winning cannot be executed immediately), the execution of the special figure game based on the approach is suspended up to a predetermined upper limit (for example, 4).

In the special symbol game, if a specific special symbol (big hit symbol, for example, "7", the actual symbol differs depending on the jackpot type described later) is stopped and displayed as a confirmed special symbol, it becomes a "big hit" and a jackpot symbol. If a predetermined special symbol (small hit symbol, for example, "2") different from the above is stopped and displayed, it becomes "small hit". Further, if a special symbol (missing symbol, for example, "-") different from the big hit symbol or the small hit symbol is stopped and displayed, it becomes "missing".

After the display result in the special figure game becomes "big hit", it is controlled to the big hit game state as an advantageous state advantageous for the player. After the display result in the special figure game becomes "small hit", it is controlled to the small hit game state.

In the big hit game state, the big winning opening formed by the special variable winning ball device 7 is opened in a predetermined mode. The open state is a combination of the elapsed timing of a predetermined period (for example, 29 seconds or 1.8 seconds) and the timing until the number of game balls that have entered the large winning opening reaches a predetermined number (for example, 9). It will continue until the earlier timing. The predetermined period is an upper limit period during which the large winning opening can be opened in one round, and is also hereinafter referred to as an open upper limit period. One cycle in which the big winning opening is open in this way is called a round (round game). In the jackpot game state, the round can be repeatedly executed until the maximum number of times (15 times or 2 times) is reached.

In the big hit game state, the player can obtain the prize ball by letting the game ball enter the big prize opening. Therefore, the jackpot gaming state is an advantageous state for the player. The larger the number of rounds in the jackpot game state and the longer the opening upper limit period, the more advantageous it is for the player.

A jackpot type is set for "big hit". For example, multiple types of opening modes (number of rounds and upper limit period of opening) of the big winning opening and game states after the big hit game state (normal state, time saving state, probability change state, etc., which will be described later) are prepared, and the big hit is made according to these. The type is set. As the jackpot type, a jackpot type in which many prize balls can be obtained, a jackpot type in which few prize balls are obtained, or a jackpot type in which almost no prize balls can be obtained may be provided.

In the small hit game state, the large winning opening formed by the special variable winning ball device 7 is opened in a predetermined opening mode. For example, in the small hit game state, the same opening mode as the big hit game state in some big hit types (the number of times the big winning opening is opened is the same as the number of rounds, and the closing timing of the big winning opening is also the same. Etc.), the big prize opening becomes open. As with the big hit type, the small hit type may be provided for the "small hit".

After the jackpot game state is completed, it may be controlled to a time saving state or a probability change state according to the jackpot type.

In the time saving state, control (time saving control) is executed in which the average special figure fluctuation time (period in which the special figure is changed) is shortened as compared with the normal state. In the time saving state, the average fluctuation time of the normal map (the period during which the normal map is changed) is shortened from the normal state, and the probability of becoming a "normal map hit" in the normal map game is improved from the normal state. Controls (high opening control, high base control) that make it easier for the game ball to enter the second starting winning opening are also executed. The time saving state is a state in which the variation efficiency of the special symbol (particularly the second special symbol) is improved, which is advantageous for the player.

In the probability variation state (probability fluctuation state), in addition to the time saving control, the probability variation control in which the probability that the display result becomes a "big hit" is higher than in the normal state is executed. The probabilistic state is a state that is more advantageous for the player because it is a state in which a “big hit” is likely to occur in addition to improving the fluctuation efficiency of the special symbol.

The time saving state and the probability change state continue until any one of the end conditions such as the execution of the special figure game a predetermined number of times and the start of the next big hit game state are satisfied first. A game whose end condition is that the special figure game has been executed a predetermined number of times is also referred to as a number cut (time cut time reduction, number cut probability change, etc.).

The normal state is a gaming state other than a special state such as an advantageous state such as a big hit gaming state, a time saving state, or a probability change state, which is advantageous for the player, and the display result in the normal drawing game is "normal drawing hit". The pachinko game machine 1 such as the probability and the probability that the display result in the special figure game becomes a "big hit" returns to a predetermined state after the power is turned on, such as the initial setting state of the pachinko game machine 1 (for example, when a system reset is performed). It is in the same controlled state as (when the process is not executed).

The state in which the probability change control is executed is also called a high probability state, and the state in which the probability change control is not executed is also called a low probability state. The state in which the time saving control is executed is also called a high base state, and the state in which the time saving control is not executed is also called a low base state. By combining these, the time saving state is also called the low accuracy high base state, the probability variation state is called the high accuracy high base state, and the normal state is also called the low accuracy low base state. The high-accuracy state and low-base state are also called the high-accuracy low-base state.

After the small hit game state ends, the game state is not changed, and the game state is continuously controlled to the game state before the display result of the special figure game becomes "small hit" (however, "small hit" occurs. If the special figure game at the time is the special figure game of the predetermined number of times in the number of times cut, the game state is naturally changed). It should be noted that there may be no "small hit" as the display result of the special figure game.

The game state may change based on the fact that the game ball has passed through a specific area (for example, a specific area in the big winning opening) during the big hit game state. For example, when the game ball passes through a specific area, it may be controlled to a probabilistic state after the big hit game state.

(Progress of production, etc.)
In the pachinko gaming machine 1, various effects (effects of notifying the progress of the game and enlivening the game) are executed according to the progress of the game. The production will be described below. The effect is performed by displaying various effect images on the image display device 5, but in addition to or in place of the display, audio output from the speakers 8L and 8R, and a game effect lamp 9 It may be turned on or off, the operation of the movable body 32, or an effect using an arbitrary effect device including a part or all of them.

As an effect executed according to the progress of the game, in the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R of the "left", "middle", and "right" provided in the image display device 5, the first special figure game or the first 2 In response to the start of the special figure game, the variable display of the decorative pattern is started. At the timing when the display result (also referred to as the finalized special symbol) is stopped and displayed in the first special symbol game or the second special symbol game, the final decorative symbol (combination of three decorative symbols) that is the display result of the variable display of the decorative symbol ) Is also displayed (derived) as a stop.

In the period from the start to the end of the variable display of the decorative symbol, the variable display mode of the decorative symbol may be a predetermined reach mode (reach is established). Here, the reach mode is a variable display of a decorative symbol that has not yet been stopped and displayed when the decorative symbol that has been stopped and displayed on the screen of the image display device 5 constitutes a part of the jackpot combination described later. It is a mode in which is continuing.

In addition, the reach effect is executed in response to the above-mentioned reach mode during the variable display of the decorative symbol. In the pachinko gaming machine 1, the ratio of the display result (display result of the special figure game or variable display of the decorative symbol) to be "big hit" (also called big hit reliability or big hit expectation) is determined according to the production mode. Multiple different types of reach effects are performed. Reach production includes, for example, normal reach and super reach, which has a higher hit reliability than normal reach.

When the display result of the special figure game is "big hit", a fixed decorative symbol that is a predetermined jackpot combination is derived as a display result of variable display of the decorative symbol on the screen of the image display device 5 (decoration). The display result of the variable display of the symbol is "big hit"). As an example, the same decorative symbols (for example, "7") are aligned and stopped and displayed on predetermined effective lines in the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R of "left", "middle", and "right". ..

In the case of a "probability change jackpot" that is controlled to a probability change state after the end of the jackpot game state, an odd number of decorative symbols (for example, "7") are aligned and displayed as a stop, and the probability change state is entered after the end of the jackpot game state. In the case of an uncontrolled "non-probability variable jackpot (normal jackpot)", an even number of decorative symbols (for example, "6") may be aligned and displayed as a stop. In this case, the odd-numbered decorative symbol is also referred to as a probabilistic symbol, and the even-numbered decorative symbol is also referred to as a non-probable variable symbol (normal symbol). After the non-probability pattern is in the reach mode, the promotion effect that finally becomes the "probability jackpot" may be executed.

When the display result of the special figure game is "small hit", a fixed decorative symbol (for example, "for example," "is a predetermined small hit combination as a display result of variable display of the decorative symbol on the screen of the image display device 5. 1 3 5 ”etc.) Is derived (the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern is a“ small hit ”). As an example, the decorative symbols constituting the chance eyes are stopped and displayed on the predetermined effective lines in the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R of "left", "middle", and "right". In addition, when the display result of the special figure game becomes "big hit" of some big hit types (big hit type of big hit game state in the same mode as small hit game state) and when it becomes "small hit". , A common fixed decorative pattern may be derived and displayed.

When the display result of the special figure game is "missing", the variable display mode of the decorative symbol is not the reach mode, and the variable display result of the decorative symbol is a fixed decorative symbol of a non-reach combination ("" (Also referred to as "non-reach loss") may be stopped and displayed (the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern may be "non-reach loss"). In addition, when the display result is "missing", after the variable display mode of the decorative symbol is changed to the reach mode, the display result of the variable display of the decorative symbol is a predetermined reach combination ("reach loss") that is not a jackpot combination. The fixed decorative symbol (also referred to as) may be stopped and displayed (the display result of the variable display of the decorative symbol may be "reach loss").

The effect that the pachinko gaming machine 1 can execute includes displaying the above-mentioned variable display compatible display (hold display or active display). Further, as another effect, for example, a notice effect for notifying the reliability of the jackpot is executed during the variable display of the decorative symbol. The notice effect includes a notice effect for notifying the jackpot reliability in the variable display during execution and a pre-reading notice effect for notifying the jackpot reliability in the variable display (variable display in which execution is suspended) before execution. As the pre-reading notice effect, an effect of changing the display mode of the variable display compatible display (hold display or active display) to a mode different from the usual mode may be executed.

Further, in the image display device 5, the decorative symbol is temporarily stopped during the variable display of the decorative symbol, and then the variable display is restarted to make one variable display look like a plurality of variable displays in a pseudo manner. The pseudo-continuous production may be executed.

Even during the big hit game state, the big hit middle effect that notifies the big hit game state is executed. As the big hit middle effect, an effect of notifying the number of rounds and a promotion effect indicating that the value of the big hit gaming state is improved may be executed. Further, even during the small hit game state, the small hit medium effect for notifying the small hit game state is executed. It should be noted that the big hit game during the small hit game state and in some big hit types (the big hit type in the big hit game state in the same mode as the small hit game state, for example, the big hit type in which the subsequent game state is a highly accurate state). By executing a common effect depending on the state, the player may not know whether the player is currently in the small hit game state or the big hit game state. In such a case, by executing a common effect after the end of the small hit game state and after the end of the big hit game state, it is not possible to distinguish between the high accuracy state and the low accuracy state. You may.

Further, for example, when a special figure game or the like is not executed, a demo (demonstration) image is displayed on the image display device 5 (a customer waiting demo effect is executed).

(Board configuration)
The pachinko gaming machine 1 is equipped with, for example, a main board 11, an effect control board 12, a voice control board 13, a lamp control board 14, a relay board 15, and the like as shown in FIG. In addition, various boards such as a payout control board, an information terminal board, a launch control board, and a power supply board are arranged on the back surface of the pachinko gaming machine 1.

The main board 11 is a control board on the main side, and the progress of the above-mentioned game in the pachinko game machine 1 (execution of a special figure game (including management of hold), execution of a normal figure game (including management of hold), and a big hit. It has a function to control a game state, a small hit game state, a game state, etc.). The main board 11 includes a game control microcomputer 100, a switch circuit 110, a solenoid circuit 111, and the like.

The game control microcomputer 100 mounted on the main board 11 is, for example, a one-chip microcomputer, which includes a ROM (Read Only Memory) 101, a RAM (Random Access Memory) 102, and a CPU (Central Processing Unit) 103. , A random number circuit 104 and an I / O (Input / Output port) 105 are provided.

The CPU 103 performs a process of controlling the progress of the game (a process of realizing the function of the main board 11) by executing the program stored in the ROM 101. At this time, various data stored in the ROM 101 (data such as a fluctuation pattern described later, an effect control command described later, and various tables referred to when making various decisions described later) are used, and the RAM 102 is used as the main memory. .. The RAM 102 is a backup RAM in which the stored contents are stored for a predetermined period even if the power supply to the pachinko gaming machine 1 is stopped in part or in whole. Note that all or part of the program stored in the ROM 101 may be expanded into the RAM 102 and executed on the RAM 102.

The random number circuit 104 updatablely counts numerical data indicating various random number values (game random numbers) used when controlling the progress of the game. The game random number may be updated by the CPU 103 executing a predetermined computer program (updated by software).

The I / O 105 includes, for example, an input port into which various signals (detection signals described later) are input, various signals (first special symbol display device 4A, second special symbol display device 4B, ordinary symbol display 20, first hold). It includes an output port for transmitting (a signal for controlling (driving) the display 25A, the second hold display 25B, the normal figure hold display 25C, etc., and a solenoid drive signal).

The switch circuit 110 is a detection signal (a game ball has passed or is passed) from various switches for detecting a game ball (gate switch 21, start port switch (first start port switch 22A and second start port switch 22B), count switch 23). It takes in a detection signal indicating that the switch has been turned on by entering and transmits it to the game control microcomputer 100. By transmitting the detection signal, the passage or approach of the game ball is detected.

The solenoid circuit 111 transmits a solenoid drive signal (for example, a signal for turning on the solenoid 81 or the solenoid 82) from the game control microcomputer 100 to the solenoid 81 for an ordinary electric accessory or the solenoid 82 for a prize-winning door. To transmit.

The main board 11 (microcomputer 100 for game control) issues an effect control command (a command for designating (notifying) the progress of the game) according to the progress of the game as a part of controlling the progress of the game. Supply to 12. The effect control command output from the main board 11 is relayed by the relay board 15 and supplied to the effect control board 12. The effect control command includes, for example, various determination results on the main board 11 (for example, a display result of a special figure game (including a jackpot type)) and a variation pattern used when executing a special figure game (details will be described later). )), The game status (for example, the start and end of the variable display, the opening status of the large winning opening, the occurrence of winning, the number of stored memories, the game status), the command for specifying the occurrence of an error, and the like are included.

The effect control board 12 is a control board on the sub side independent of the main board 11, receives an effect control command, and produces an effect (various effects according to the progress of the game) based on the received effect control command. It has a function of executing various notifications such as driving of the movable body 32, error notification, and notification of power failure recovery).

The effect control board 12 is equipped with an effect control CPU 120, a ROM 121, a RAM 122, a display control unit 123, a random number circuit 124, and an I / O 125.

The effect control CPU 120 is a process for executing the effect together with the display control unit 123 by executing the program stored in the ROM 121 (a process for realizing the above-mentioned function of the effect control board 12, and the effect to be executed). (Including the decision etc.). At this time, various data (data such as various tables) stored in the ROM 121 are used, and the RAM 122 is used as the main memory.

The effect control CPU 120 displays the execution of the effect based on the detection signal from the controller sensor unit 35A or the push sensor 35B (a signal output when an operation by the player is detected and an appropriate signal indicating the operation content). It may also instruct the control unit 123.

The display control unit 123 includes a VDP (Video Display Processor), a CGROM (Character Generator ROM), a VRAM (Video RAM), and the like, and executes the effect based on the effect execution instruction from the effect control CPU 120.

The display control unit 123 supplies the image display device 5 with a video signal corresponding to the effect to be executed based on the effect execution instruction from the effect control CPU 120, so that the effect image is displayed on the image display device 5. The display control unit 123 further supplies a sound designation signal (a signal for designating the output sound) to the sound control board 13 in order to output sound synchronized with the display of the effect image and turn on / off the game effect lamp 9. Or, a lamp signal (a signal for designating a lamp on / off mode) is supplied to the lamp control board 14. Further, the display control unit 123 supplies a signal for operating the movable body 32 to the movable body 32 or a drive circuit for driving the movable body 32.

The voice control board 13 is equipped with various circuits for driving the speakers 8L and 8R, drives the speakers 8L and 8R based on the sound designation signal, and outputs the sound designated by the sound designation signal from the speakers 8L and 8R. Let me.

The lamp control board 14 is equipped with various circuits for driving the game effect lamp 9, drives the game effect lamp 9 based on the lamp signal, and turns on / off the game effect lamp 9 in a mode designated by the lamp signal. To do. In this way, the display control unit 123 controls the audio output and the lighting / extinguishing of the lamp.

The effect control CPU 120 executes audio output, lamp lighting / extinguishing control (sound designation signal, lamp signal supply, etc.), and movable body 32 control (signal supply for operating the movable body 32, etc.). You may do so.

The random number circuit 124 updatablely counts numerical data indicating various random number values (random numbers for effect) used to execute various effects. The effect random number may be one that is updated (updated by software) when the effect control CPU 120 executes a predetermined computer program.

The I / O 125 mounted on the effect control board 12 is for transmitting various signals (video signal, sound designation signal, lamp signal) and an input port for taking in the effect control command transmitted from, for example, the main board 11. It is configured to include the output port of.

Boards other than the main board 11, such as the effect control board 12, the sound control board 13, and the lamp control board 14, are also referred to as sub-boards. A plurality of sub-boards may be provided for each function as in the pachinko gaming machine 1, or one sub-board may be configured to have a plurality of functions.

(motion)
Next, the operation (action) of the pachinko gaming machine 1 will be described.

(Main operation of main board 11)
First, the main operations on the main board 11 will be described. When the power supply to the pachinko game machine 1 is started, the game control microcomputer 100 is started, and the game control main process is executed by the CPU 103. FIG. 3 is a flowchart showing a game control main process executed by the CPU 103 on the main board 11.

In the game control main process shown in FIG. 3, the CPU 103 first sets interrupt prohibition (step S1). Subsequently, necessary initial settings are made (step S2). The initial settings include stack pointer settings, register settings for built-in devices (CTC (counter / timer circuit), parallel input / output ports, etc.), settings for making the RAM 102 accessible, and the like.

Next, it is determined whether or not the output signal from the clear switch is ON (step S3). The clear switch is mounted on the power supply board, for example. When the power is turned on with the clear switch turned on, an output signal (clear signal) is input to the game control microcomputer 100 via the input port. When the output signal from the clear switch is on (step S3; Yes), the initialization process (step S8) is executed. In the initialization process, the CPU 103 performs a RAM clear process for clearing the flags, counters, and buffers stored in the RAM 102, and sets initial values in the work area.

Further, the CPU 103 transmits an effect control command instructing initialization to the effect control board 12 (step S9). When the effect control CPU 120 receives the effect control command, for example, the image display device 5 displays a screen for notifying that the control of the game machine has been initialized.

If the output signal from the clear switch is not on (step S3; No), it is determined whether or not the backup data is stored in the RAM 102 (backup RAM) (step S4). When the power supply to the pachinko gaming machine 1 is stopped due to an unexpected power failure or the like (power interruption), the CPU 103 executes the power supply stop processing immediately before the pachinko gaming machine 1 becomes inoperable due to the stop of the power supply. In this power supply stop processing, a processing of turning on a backup flag indicating that data is backed up to the RAM 102, a data protection processing of the RAM 102, and the like are executed. The data protection process includes addition of an error detection code (checksum, parity bit, etc.) and a process of backing up various data. The data to be backed up includes various data (including various flags, various timer states, etc.) for advancing the game, as well as the state of the backup flag and the error detection code. In step S4, it is determined whether or not the backup flag is on. When the backup flag is off and the backup data is not stored in the RAM 102 (step S4; No), the initialization process (step S8) is executed.

When the backup data is stored in the RAM 102 (step S4; Yes), the CPU 103 checks the data of the backed up data (used by using an error detection code) and determines whether or not the data is normal (step). S5). In step S5, for example, it is determined by the parity bit or the checksum whether or not the data in the RAM 102 matches the data when the power supply is stopped. When it is determined that these match, it is determined that the data in the RAM 102 is normal.

If it is determined that the data in the RAM 102 is not normal (step S5; No), the internal state cannot be returned to the state when the power supply is stopped, so the initialization process (step S8) is executed.

When it is determined that the data in the RAM 102 is normal (step S5; Yes), the CPU 103 performs a recovery process (step S6) for returning the internal state of the main board 11 to the state when the power supply is stopped. In the recovery process, the CPU 103 sets the work area based on the stored contents (contents of the backed up data) of the RAM 102. As a result, the game state is restored to the state when the power supply is stopped, and if the special symbol is changing, the change of the special symbol is restarted from the state before the restoration by executing the game control timer interrupt process described later. Will be.

Then, the CPU 103 transmits an effect control command instructing recovery from the power failure to the effect control board 12 (step S7). In accordance with this, an effect control command that specifies the game state before the power failure that is backed up, and an effect control that specifies the display result of the special figure game that is being executed when the special figure game is being executed. You may want to send a command. For these commands, the same commands that are set to be transmitted in the special symbol process processing described later can be used. When the effect control CPU 120 receives the effect control command that specifies the time of recovery from the power failure, for example, the image display device 5 indicates that the image display device 5 has recovered from the power failure or is recovering from the power failure. , Display the screen for notification. The effect control CPU 120 may display an appropriate screen based on the effect control command.

After the restoration process or the initialization process is completed and the effect control command is transmitted to the effect control board 12, the CPU 103 executes the random number circuit setting process for initializing the random number circuit 104 (step S10). Then, the CTC register built in the game control microcomputer 100 is set so that the timer is interrupted periodically every predetermined time (for example, 2 ms) (step S11), and interrupts are permitted (step S12). ). After that, the loop processing is started. After that, an interrupt request signal is sent from the CTC to the CPU 103 every predetermined time (for example, 2 ms), and the CPU 103 can periodically execute the timer interrupt process.

When the CPU 103 that has executed the game control main process receives the interrupt request signal from the CTC and receives the interrupt request, the CPU 103 executes the game control timer interrupt process shown in the flowchart of FIG. When the game control timer interrupt process shown in FIG. 4 is started, the CPU 103 first executes a predetermined switch process to perform the gate switch 21, the first start port switch 22A, and the second start port via the switch circuit 110. It is determined whether or not detection signals are received from various switches such as the switch 22B and the count switch 23 (step S21). Subsequently, by executing a predetermined main-side error process, an abnormality diagnosis of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is performed, and a warning can be generated if necessary according to the diagnosis result (step S22). After that, by executing a predetermined information output process, for example, the jackpot information (information indicating the number of times the jackpot has occurred) and the start information (starting) supplied to the hall management computer installed outside the pachinko gaming machine 1. Data such as information such as the number of times of winning and the probability fluctuation information (information indicating the number of times of the probability change state) are output (step S23).

Following the information output process, a game random number update process for updating at least a part of the game random numbers used on the main board 11 side by software is executed (step S24). After that, the CPU 103 executes the special symbol process process (step S25). By executing the special symbol process process for each timer interrupt by the CPU 103, it is possible to manage the execution and hold of the special symbol game, control the big hit game state and the small hit game state, control the game state, and the like (for details, refer to the details. See below).

Following the special symbol process processing, the normal symbol process processing is executed (step S26). By executing the normal symbol process processing for each timer interrupt, the CPU 103 manages the execution and hold of the normal figure game based on the detection signal from the gate switch 21 (based on the game ball passing through the passing gate 41). It enables opening control of the variable winning ball device 6B based on "per-figure". The execution of the normal figure game is performed by driving the normal symbol display 20, and the number of normal figure reservations is displayed by turning on the normal figure hold display 25C.

After executing the normal symbol process process, as a part of the game control timer interrupt process, a process when a power failure occurs, a process for paying out a prize ball, and the like may be performed. After that, the CPU 103 executes the command control process (step S27). The CPU 103 may send and set an effect control command in each of the above processes. In the command control process of step S27, a process of transmitting the effect control command set for transmission to a control board on the sub side such as the effect control board 12 is performed. After executing the command control process, the interrupt is permitted and then the game control timer interrupt process is terminated.

FIG. 5 is a flowchart showing an example of the process executed in step S25 shown in FIG. 4 as the special symbol process process. In this special symbol process process, the CPU 103 first executes a start winning determination process (step S101).

In the start winning determination process, a process of detecting the occurrence of a start winning, storing the hold information in a predetermined area of the RAM 102, and updating the hold storage number is executed. When the start winning is generated, the display result (including the jackpot type) and the random value for determining the fluctuation pattern are extracted and stored as hold information. Further, a process of pre-reading and determining a display result or a fluctuation pattern may be executed based on the extracted random number value. After storing the hold information and the number of hold storages, the transmission setting for transmitting the effect control command for specifying the judgment result such as the occurrence of the start winning prize, the number of hold storages, the read-ahead judgment, etc. is set on the effect control board 12. Be told. The effect control command at the time of starting winning, which is set to be transmitted in this way, is executed from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12 by, for example, executing the command control process in step S27 shown in FIG. 4 after the special symbol process process is completed. Is transmitted to.

After executing the start winning determination process in step S101, the CPU 103 selects and executes any of the processes of steps S110 to S120 according to the value of the special figure process flag provided in the RAM 102. In each process (steps S110 to S120) of the special symbol process process, a transmission setting for transmitting an effect control command corresponding to each process to the effect control board 12 is performed.

The special symbol normal processing in step S110 is executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is “0” (initial value). In this special symbol normal processing, it is determined whether or not to start the first special figure game or the second special figure game based on the presence or absence of reserved information. In addition, in the special symbol normal processing, whether or not the display result of the special symbol or decorative symbol is set as "big hit" or "small hit" based on the random value for determining the display result, and the big hit type when it is set as "big hit". Is determined (predetermined) before the display result is derived and displayed. Further, in the special symbol normal processing, a fixed special symbol (either a big hit symbol, a small hit symbol, or a lost symbol) to be stopped and displayed in the special symbol game is set according to the determined display result. After that, the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to "1", and the special symbol normal processing ends. In addition, the special figure game using the second special figure may be executed with priority over the special figure game using the first special figure (also referred to as special figure 2 priority digestion). Further, the winning order of the game balls to the first starting winning opening and the second starting winning opening may be memorized, and the starting condition of the special figure game may be satisfied in the winning order (also referred to as winning order digestion).

When making various determinations based on the random number value, various tables stored in the ROM 101 (a table in which the determination value to be compared with the random number value is assigned to the determination result) are referred to. The same applies to other decisions on the main board 11 and various decisions on the effect control board 12. In the effect control board 12, various tables are stored in the ROM 121.

The variation pattern setting process in step S111 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is “1”. In this fluctuation pattern setting process, one of a plurality of types of fluctuation patterns is used by using a random value for determining the fluctuation pattern based on a preliminary determination result of whether or not the display result is a "big hit" or a "small hit". The process of deciding on is included. In the variation pattern setting process, when the variation pattern is determined, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "2", and the variation pattern setting process ends.

The fluctuation pattern includes the execution time of the special symbol game (special symbol fluctuation time) (which is also the execution time of the variable display of the decorative symbol), the mode of the variable display of the decorative symbol (presence or absence of reach, etc.), and the variable display of the decorative symbol. The content of the effect (type of reach effect, etc.) is specified, and it is also called a variable display pattern.

The special symbol variation process in step S112 is executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is “2”. In this special symbol change process, the process of making settings for changing the special symbol in the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol display device 4B, and the elapsed time from the start of the change of the special symbol It includes processing to measure. In addition, it is also determined whether or not the measured elapsed time has reached the special figure fluctuation time corresponding to the fluctuation pattern. Then, when the elapsed time from the start of the special symbol variation reaches the special symbol variation time, the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to "3", and the special symbol variation process ends.

The special symbol stop process in step S113 is executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is “3”. In this special symbol stop process, the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol display device 4B stop the fluctuation of the special symbol, and stop display (derive) the confirmed special symbol that is the display result of the special symbol. Contains the process of making settings for. Then, when the display result is "big hit", the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "4". On the other hand, when the big hit flag is off and the display result is "small hit", the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "8". If the display result is "missing", the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "0". When the display result is "small hit" or "loss", the game state is also updated when the time saving state or the probability change state is controlled and the end of the number of cuts is established. When the value of the special symbol process flag is updated, the special symbol stop processing ends.

The jackpot release preprocessing in step S114 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is “4”. This big hit pre-opening process includes a process of setting to open the big winning opening by starting the execution of the round in the big hit game state based on the display result being "big hit". It has been. When the large winning opening is opened, a process of supplying a solenoid drive signal to the solenoid 82 for the large winning opening door is executed. At this time, for example, the open upper limit period for keeping the big winning opening in the open state and the upper limit execution number of rounds are set according to which type of jackpot is used. When these settings are completed, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "5", and the jackpot release preprocessing ends.

The process of opening the jackpot in step S115 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is “5”. In this big hit opening process, the big winning opening is measured based on the process of measuring the elapsed time since the big winning opening is opened, the measured elapsed time, the number of game balls detected by the count switch 23, and the like. It includes a process of determining whether or not it is time to return the device from the open state to the closed state. Then, when the large winning opening is returned to the closed state, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "6" after executing a process of stopping the supply of the solenoid drive signal to the solenoid 82 for the large winning opening door. Ends processing while the jackpot is open.

The post-processing after opening the jackpot in step S116 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is “6”. In this post-opening process of the jackpot, a process of determining whether or not the number of executions of the round that opens the jackpot has reached the set upper limit execution number, and a jackpot game state when the upper limit execution number is reached. It includes processing to make settings to terminate. Then, when the number of round executions has not reached the upper limit, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "5", while when the number of round executions reaches the upper limit, the special figure process flag is set. The value is updated to "7". When the value of the special figure process flag is updated, the post-launch processing is completed.

The jackpot end processing of step S117 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is “7”. In this jackpot end process, there is a process of waiting until the waiting time corresponding to the period in which the ending effect as an effect action for notifying the end of the jackpot game state is executed, and a probability change corresponding to the end of the jackpot game state. It includes processing to make various settings to start control and time reduction control. When such a setting is made, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "0", and the jackpot end processing ends.

The small hit release preprocessing in step S118 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is “8”. This small hit pre-opening process includes a process of setting the large winning opening to be in the open state in the small hit game state based on the display result being "small hit". At this time, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "9", and the small hit release preprocessing ends.

The small hit opening process in step S119 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is “9”. In this small hit opening process, it is the timing to measure the elapsed time from the opening state of the big winning opening and to return the big winning opening from the open state to the closed state based on the measured elapsed time. It includes processing to determine whether or not it is. When the big winning opening is returned to the closed state and the end timing of the small hit game state is reached, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "10", and the processing during the small hit opening process ends.

The small hit end process in step S120 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is “10”. The small hit end process includes a process of waiting until a waiting time corresponding to a period in which the effect operation for notifying the end of the small hit game state is executed has elapsed. Here, when the small hit gaming state ends, the gaming state in the pachinko gaming machine 1 before the small hit gaming state is continued. When the waiting time at the end of the small hit game state has elapsed, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "0", and the small hit end process ends.

(Main operation of the effect control board 12)
Next, the main operation of the effect control board 12 will be described. When the effect control board 12 receives the power supply voltage from the power source board or the like, the effect control CPU 120 is activated to execute the effect control main process as shown in the flowchart of FIG. When the effect control main process shown in FIG. 6 is started, the effect control CPU 120 first executes a predetermined initialization process (step S71) to clear the RAM 122, set various initial values, and press the effect control board 12. Set the registers of the mounted CTC (counter / timer circuit). In addition, the initial operation control process is executed (step S72). In the initial operation control process, control for performing the initial operation of the movable body 32, such as control for driving the movable body 32 to return to the initial position and control for confirming a predetermined operation, is executed.

After that, it is determined whether or not the timer interrupt flag is turned on (step S73). The timer interrupt flag is set to the ON state every time a predetermined time (for example, 2 milliseconds) elapses, based on the register setting of the CTC, for example. At this time, if the timer interrupt flag is off (step S73; No), the process of step S73 is repeatedly executed and waits.

Further, on the effect control board 12, an interrupt for receiving an effect control command from the main board 11 is generated in addition to the timer interrupt that is generated every time a predetermined time elapses. This interrupt is, for example, an interrupt generated when the effect control INT signal from the main board 11 is turned on. When an interrupt occurs due to the effect control INT signal being turned on, the effect control CPU 120 automatically sets interrupt disabled, but if a CPU that is not automatically interrupt disabled is used, an interrupt occurs. It is desirable to issue a prohibition order (DI instruction). The effect control CPU 120 executes, for example, a predetermined command reception interrupt process in response to an interrupt caused by the effect control INT signal being turned on. In this command reception interrupt process, among the input ports included in the I / O 125, the effect control command is taken in from a predetermined input port that receives the control signal transmitted from the main board 11 via the relay board 15. The effect control command captured at this time is stored in, for example, the effect control command reception buffer provided in the RAM 122. After that, the effect control CPU 120 sets the interrupt enable, and then ends the command reception interrupt process.

If the timer interrupt flag is on in step S73 (step S73; Yes), the timer interrupt flag is cleared and turned off (step S74), and the command analysis process is executed (step S75). In the command analysis process, for example, after reading various effect control commands transmitted from the game control microcomputer 100 of the main board 11 and stored in the effect control command reception buffer, the read effect control commands are used. Corresponding settings and controls are performed. For example, the read effect control command may be stored in a predetermined area of the RAM 122 or stored in the RAM 122 so that which effect control command is received and the content specified by the effect control command can be confirmed by the effect control process process or the like. Turn on the provided receive flag. Further, when the effect control command specifies the game state, the display control unit 123 may be instructed to display the background according to the game state.

After executing the command analysis process in step S75, the effect control process process is executed (step S76). In the effect control process processing, for example, an effect image display operation in the display area of the image display device 5, an audio output operation from the speakers 8L and 8R, a lighting operation in a decorative light emitting body such as a game effect lamp 9 and a decorative LED, and a movable body 32. Controls are performed to operate various production devices such as the driving operation of the LED. Further, regarding the control content of the effect operation using various effect devices, determination, determination, setting, etc. are performed according to the effect control command or the like transmitted from the main board 11.

Following the effect control process process in step S76, the effect random number update process is executed (step S77), and at least a part of the effect random numbers used on the effect control board 12 side is updated by the software. After that, the process returns to the process of step S73. Other processes may be executed before returning to the process of step S73.

FIG. 7 is a flowchart showing an example of the process executed in step S76 of FIG. 6 as the effect control process process. In the effect control process process shown in FIG. 7, the effect control CPU 120 first executes the lookahead advance notice setting process (step S161). In the pre-reading notice setting process, for example, a determination, determination, setting, and the like for executing the pre-reading notice effect are performed based on the effect control command at the time of starting winning, which is transmitted from the main board 11. In addition, a process for displaying the hold display is executed based on the number of hold storages specified from the effect control command.

After executing the process of step S161, the effect control CPU 120 selects and executes any of the following processes of steps S170 to S177 according to, for example, the value of the effect process flag provided in the RAM 122.

The variable display start waiting process in step S170 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is “0” (initial value). This variable display start waiting process is a process of determining whether or not to start the variable display of the decorative symbol on the image display device 5 based on whether or not a command for designating the start of the variable display is received from the main board 11. Etc. are included. When it is determined that the variable display of the decorative symbol on the image display device 5 is started, the value of the effect process flag is updated to "1", and the variable display start waiting process is terminated.

The variable display start setting process in step S171 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is “1”. In this variable display start setting process, the display result of the variable display of the decorative symbol (fixed decorative symbol), the mode of the variable display of the decorative symbol, the reach effect, and various types are based on the display result and the variation pattern specified by the effect control command. It is determined whether or not various effects such as a notice effect are executed, their modes, and the execution start timing. Then, an effect control pattern (a collection of control data for instructing the display control unit 123 to execute the effect) that reflects the determination result and the like is set. After that, based on the set effect control pattern, the display control unit 123 is instructed to start executing the variable display of the decorative symbol, the value of the effect process flag is updated to "2", and the variable display start setting process is completed. The display control unit 123 starts the variable display of the decorative symbol on the image display device 5 in response to the instruction to start the execution of the variable display of the decorative symbol.

The variable display effect process in step S172 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is “2”. In this variable display effect processing, the effect control CPU 120 instructs the display control unit 123 to display the effect image based on the effect control pattern set in step S171 on the display screen of the image display device 5. , Driving the movable body 32, outputting voice and sound effect from the speakers 8L and 8R by outputting the command (sound effect signal) to the voice control board 13, and commanding the lamp control board 14 (illumination signal). Various effect controls are executed during the variable display of the decorative pattern, such as turning on / off / blinking the game effect lamp 9 and the decorative LED according to the output. After performing such effect control, for example, an end code indicating the end of variable display of the decorative symbol is read from the effect control pattern, or a command is received from the main board 11 to specify that the fixed decorative symbol is to be stopped and displayed. In response to what has been done, the final decorative symbol, which is the display result of the decorative symbol, is stopped and displayed. When the fixed decorative symbol is stopped and displayed, the value of the effect process flag is updated to "3", and the effect process during variable display ends.

The special figure hit waiting process in step S173 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is “3”. In this special figure hit waiting process, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not an effect control command that specifies to start the big hit game state or the small hit game state has been received from the main board 11. Then, when the effect control command for specifying the start of the big hit game state or the small hit game state is received, if the command specifies the start of the big hit game state, the value of the effect process flag is set to "6". Update to. On the other hand, if the command specifies the start of the small hit game state, the value of the effect process flag is updated to "4", which is a value corresponding to the small hit medium effect process. In addition, when the reception waiting time of the command elapses without receiving the command specifying to start the big hit game state or the small hit game state, it is determined that the display result in the special figure game is "missing". Then, the value of the effect process flag is updated to the initial value "0". When the value of the effect process flag is updated, the waiting process for hitting the special figure ends.

The small hit medium effect process in step S174 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is “4”. In this small hit medium effect process, the effect control CPU 120 sets, for example, an effect control pattern or the like corresponding to the effect content in the small hit game state, and executes various effect controls in the small hit game state based on the set content. .. Further, in the small hit middle effect processing, for example, in response to receiving a command from the main board 11 to specify that the small hit game state is terminated, the value of the effect process flag is set to a value corresponding to the small hit end effect. Update to a certain "5" and end the small hit medium production process.

The small hit end effect process in step S175 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is “5”. In this small hit end effect process, the effect control CPU 120 sets an effect control pattern or the like corresponding to, for example, the end of the small hit game state, and various effect controls at the end of the small hit game state based on the setting contents. To execute. After that, the value of the effect process flag is updated to the initial value "0", and the small hit end effect process is terminated.

The jackpot effect process in step S176 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is “6”. In this big hit middle effect processing, the effect control CPU 120 sets, for example, an effect control pattern corresponding to the effect content in the big hit game state, and executes various effect controls in the big hit game state based on the set content. Further, in the jackpot effect processing, for example, the value of the effect process flag is set to a value corresponding to the ending effect process "7" in response to receiving a command from the main board 11 to specify that the jackpot game state is terminated. Update to ", and end the production process during the big hit.

The ending effect process of step S177 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is “7”. In this ending effect processing, the effect control CPU 120 sets, for example, an effect control pattern or the like corresponding to the end of the jackpot game state, and controls various effects of the ending effect at the end of the jackpot game state based on the setting contents. Execute. After that, the value of the effect process flag is updated to the initial value "0", and the ending effect process ends.

(Modified example of basic explanation)
The present invention is not limited to the pachinko gaming machine 1 described in the above basic description, and various modifications and applications are possible without departing from the gist of the present invention.

The pachinko gaming machine 1 of the above basic explanation is a payout type gaming machine that pays out a predetermined number of game media as a prize based on the occurrence of a prize, but the game medium is enclosed and a score is given based on the occurrence of the prize. It may be an enclosed gaming machine.

Only one type of symbol (for example, a symbol indicating "-") is displayed during the variable display of the special symbol, and the variable display may be performed by repeating the display and extinguishing of the symbol. Further, even if the symbol is displayed during the variable display, the symbol may not be displayed when the variable display is stopped (the symbol indicating "-" may not be displayed as the display result).

In the above basic explanation, the pachinko game machine 1 is shown as a game machine, but a medal is inserted and a predetermined number of bets is set, and a plurality of types of symbols are rotated according to the operation of the operation lever by the player, and the player When the symbol is stopped in response to the operation of the stop button by, if the combination of stop symbols becomes a specific combination of symbols, a slot machine capable of executing a game in which a predetermined number of medals are paid out to the player (for example, a big bonus) The present invention can also be applied to a slot machine equipped with one or more of regular bonus, RT, AT, ART, and CZ (hereinafter, bonus, etc.).

The program and data for realizing the present invention are not limited to the form of being distributed and provided by the detachable recording medium to the computer device included in the pachinko gaming machine 1, and the computer device and the like in advance. It may take the form of being distributed by installing it in the storage device of the. Further, the program and data for realizing the present invention are distributed by downloading from another device on the network connected via the communication line or the like by providing the communication processing unit. It doesn't matter.

The game can be executed not only by attaching a detachable recording medium, but also by temporarily storing the programs and data downloaded via the communication line or the like in the internal memory or the like. It may be executed directly using the hardware resources of other devices on the network connected via a communication line or the like. Further, the game can be executed by exchanging data with another computer device or the like via a network.

In addition, in this specification, one of the expressions for comparison of various ratios such as the execution ratio of the production (expressions such as "high", "low", and "differentiate") is "0%". It may be included. For example, one may have a percentage of "0%" and the other may have a percentage of "100%" or less than "100%".

(Explanation of the feature part regarding the set value)
Hereinafter, the feature portion related to the set value in the pachinko gaming machine 1 will be described.

Although not shown, the main board 11 of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is mounted on the back surface of the pachinko gaming machine 1 in a state of being housed in a board case configured to be openable by the first member and the second member. ing. Further, although not shown, the main board 11 has a lock switch for switching the set value of the pachinko gaming machine 1 to a changeable set value change state, and a jackpot which will be described later in the set value change state. A setting changeover switch that functions as a setting switch for changing a set value such as a winning probability (ball output rate) and an open sensor that detects the opening of a gaming machine frame are provided. The set value change state in the present embodiment is also a state in which the staff of the game hall or the like can confirm the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 (set value confirmation state).

Operation units such as these lock switches and setting changeover switches that can be operated by the staff of the amusement park and the like are provided in the setting changeover main body unit and are housed in the board case together with the main board 11. The lock switch and the setting changeover switch are exposed to the back side through an opening formed in the back surface of the board case so that the lock switch and the setting changeover switch can be operated without opening the board case.

A board case containing a lock switch and a setting changeover switch is provided on the back surface of the pachinko gaming machine 1. Therefore, the lock switch and the setting changeover switch are extremely difficult or impossible to operate when the game machine frame is closed, and can be operated by opening the game machine frame using a predetermined door key. .. Further, since the lock switch requires the operation of the setting key possessed by the staff of the game hall or the like, only the administrator who possesses the setting key can operate the lock switch. The lock switch is also a switch that can perform an ON / OFF switching operation by using a setting key. In the present embodiment, a mode in which the door key and the setting key are separate keys is illustrated, but these may be shared by one key.

A display monitor capable of displaying set values and base values is arranged on the board case. The display monitor is connected to the main board 11 and is arranged on the upper part of the board case. That is, the display monitor is arranged in front of the main board 11 in the board case when visually recognizing it. Since the main board 11 cannot be visually recognized when the gaming machine frame is not opened, the front surface when the main board 11 is visually recognized is the back surface side of the gaming board 2 when the gaming machine frame is opened. This is the front of the pachinko machine 1 and is different from the front of the pachinko machine 1. As described above, the display monitor is arranged in front of the game board 2 when the back side of the game board 2 is visually recognized when the frame for the game machine is open. However, the front surface when the main board 11 is visually recognized and the front surface of the pachinko gaming machine 1 may be common.

The display monitor includes a first display unit, a second display unit, a third display unit, and a fourth display unit. The first display unit to the fourth display unit of the display monitor are each composed of seven segments composed of seven segments drawing the character "8" and dots arranged at the lower right side of the seven segments. .. The first display unit to the fourth display unit of the display monitor can be lit or blinked in various colors such as red, blue, green, yellow, and white. It is also possible to display different colors or so-called rainbows while changing these colors in an extremely short cycle.

A game information display unit may be provided as a predetermined position of the game board 2 of the pachinko game machine 1, for example, at a lower left position of the game area. A round indicator, a right-handed lamp, a probability variation lamp, and a time saving lamp are collectively arranged in the game information display unit. The round display can display the number of rounds and the type of big hit in the big hit game during the big hit game. The right-handed lamp lights up in a game state in which the game ball is launched toward the right game area, such as a low-accuracy high-base state as a time-saving state or a big hit game state. The probabilistic lamp lights up when it is in the probabilistic state. The time saving lamp lights up when the time saving state is reached. The round display is composed of 5 segments (LEDs).

The pachinko gaming machine 1 is configured such that the winning probability (ball output rate) of a big hit changes according to a set value. For example, in the special symbol normal processing of the special symbol process processing, the jackpot winning probability (ball output rate) is changed by using the display result determination table (winning probability) according to the set value. The set value is composed of 6 stages from 1 to 6, with 6 having the highest payout rate, and the smaller the value in the order of 6, 5, 4, 3, 2, 1 the lower the payout rate. That is, when 6 is set as the set value, the advantage is highest for the player, and the smaller the value in the order of 5, 4, 3, 2, 1 is, the lower the advantage is. Further, as for the set value, 6 which is the largest value is the most disadvantageous value for the game field side, and the smaller the value in the order of 5, 4, 3, 2, 1 is the more advantageous value for the game field side. If the ball output rate changes according to the set value, for example, the jackpot probability may change depending on the set value, and although the jackpot probability is constant, the number of rounds in the jackpot game state changes depending on the set value. May be good. As described above, the pachinko gaming machine 1 is configured so that any one of a plurality of setting values having different advantages for the player can be set. The set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is notified by transmitting a set value designation command from the side of the main board 11 to the side of the effect control board 12.

(Explanation of feature units 91AK and 92AK)
FIG. 8-1 shows a configuration example of various circuits mounted on the effect control board 12 with respect to the feature units 91AK and 92AK. In the configuration example shown in FIG. 8-1, various circuits such as the effect control microprocessor 91AK100, the input circuit 91AK121, the memory controller 91AK122, the effect data memory 91AK123, the ROM91AK124, the RAM91AK125, and the watchdog timer 91AK126 are mounted on the effect control board 12. ing. The effect control microprocessor 91AK100 includes a CPU 91AK131, a VDP91AK132, a voice processing circuit 91AK133, a lamp control circuit 91AK134, a motor control circuit 135, and a built-in memory 91AK136. The VDP91AK132 includes an instruction decoder 91AK141, a demultiplexer 91AK142, a video decoder 91AK143, a moving image renderer 91AK144, a character image renderer 91AK145, a text image renderer 91AK146, a VRAM91AK147, and a display drive circuit 91AK148. The voice processing circuit 91AK133 includes a voice decoder 91AK151.

The effect control microprocessor 91AK100 executes data processing and signal processing based on the effect control command received from the main board 11, thereby decorating the image display device 5, speakers 8L, 8R, game effect lamp 9, and other decorations. An integrated processor in which a circuit capable of controlling the execution of an effect using a part or all of a plurality of effect devices, such as an LED for effect and a movable member for effect such as a movable body 32, is integrated in one chip .. The effect control microprocessor 91AK100 includes a CPU 91AK131, VDP91AK132, and a built-in memory 91AK136, while a part or all of the sound processing circuit 91AK133, the lamp control circuit 91AK134, and the motor control circuit 91AK135 is a effect control microprocessor. It may be provided outside the 91AK100.

The input circuit 91AK121 may include a buffer circuit or the like. The buffer circuit of the input circuit 91AK121 is used to receive an effect control command transmitted from the main board 11 via the relay board 15. The memory controller 91AK122 executes various processes on the stored data of the effect data memory 91AK123 in response to the request signal supplied from the effect control microprocessor 91AK100. The effect data memory 91AK123 stores in advance the effect data that can be used to execute the effect using the effect device, such as various image data indicating the display image in the image display device 5. The image data stored in the effect data memory 91AK123 may include moving image data and still image data. As the still image data, character image data which is sprite image data which is a plurality of types of image element data corresponding to a plurality of types of effect images, such as a plurality of types of decorative patterns variably displayed on the screen of the image display device 5. It suffices if it is prepared. The effect image corresponding to the decorative pattern may be included in the character image. In addition, an arbitrary character image displayed on the screen of the image display device 5, specifically, an effect image showing a person, a figure, a symbol, or the like, and image data of a background image are stored in advance in the effect data memory 91AK123. You just have to. As the still image data, for example, text image data that enables characters to be displayed on the screen of the image display device 5 may be prepared. In addition to the image data, the effect data memory 91AK123 may store a part or all of the audio data used for the audio output by the speakers 8L and 8R. The effect data memory 91AK123 may store a part or all of the lamp drive data used for lighting the light emitting member such as the game effect lamp 9 and the decorative LED. The effect data memory 91AK123 may store a part or all of the motor drive data used for rotationally driving the drive motor that operates the movable member 32 and the like. The effect data memory 91AK123 may be any non-volatile semiconductor memory such as a NAND flash memory that can be electrically erased, written, or rewritten. However, the effect data memory 91AK123 is used as a read-only storage device in the normal use state in which the progress of the effect in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is controlled.

The ROM 91AK 124 stores a computer program for effect control, fixed data, and the like. The RAM 91AK 125 provides a work area for the CPU 91AK 131 of the effect control microprocessor 91AK100. The watchdog timer 91AK126 has a counter circuit that counts up or down based on the setting of the built-in register, and when the measurement time elapses from the start time (timeout time) and a timeout occurs, a timeout that becomes a time-lapse signal. Generate a signal. The time-out signal is input to the CPU 91AK131 of the effect control microprocessor 91AK100. Due to the generation of the timeout signal, the CPU 91AK131 is reset, and the effect control microprocessor 91AK100 is restarted.

In addition to the effect control program, the ROM 91AK124 stores various table data and the like used for controlling the effect operation. For example, in the ROM 91AK 124, a plurality of determination tables prepared for the CPU 91AK131 of the effect control microprocessor 91AK100 to perform various determinations, determinations, and settings, table data constituting the determination table, and various effect control patterns are configured. Pattern data etc. are stored. The effect control pattern includes, for example, effect control execution data (display control data, voice control data, lamp control data, motor control data, operation detection control data, etc.) and an end code associated with the effect control process timer determination value. It is composed of process data. A part or all of the effect control pattern and the effect control execution data may be configured as a display list. The display list is data of a group of instructions in which a series of transfer instructions to be executed by VDP91AK132 are described according to the order of image processing and the like. The display list may include a display control command group, a voice control command group, a lamp control command group, and a motor control command group in a mixed manner. By controlling the progress of the effect using such a display list, it is sufficient that the electric components for the effect can be controlled in cooperation with each other. The RAM 91AK 125 stores programs and various data used for controlling electrical components for production. The CPU 91AK131 may be able to read the program or data stored in the RAM 91AK 125 in a reading time shorter than the reading time of the program or data stored in the ROM 91AK 124.

The CPU 91AK131 executes control processing according to a computer program for effect control. At this time, the CPU 91AK 131 executes an effect control process for controlling the progress of the effect by the effect electric components according to the program read from the ROM 91AK 124. The effect control processing includes, for example, a fixed data reading process in which the CPU 91AK 131 reads fixed data from the ROM 91AK 124, a variable data writing process in which the CPU 91AK 131 writes various variable data to the RAM 91AK 125 and temporarily stores them, and various types in which the CPU 91AK 131 is temporarily stored in the RAM 91AK 125. The variable data read process for reading the variable data, the reception process for the CPU 91AK131 to receive various signals from the outside, the transmission process for the CPU 91AK131 to output various signals to the outside, or a part or all of these processes. May be good.

The VDP91AK132 determines the control content of the image display in the image display device 5 based on the display control command from the CPU91AK131, the register setting, and the like. For example, the VDP91AK 132 controls for executing variable display of decorative patterns and various effect displays by determining the switching timing of the effect image to be displayed on the screen of the image display device 5. The VDP91AK132 is an image processor having image data processing functions such as a high-speed drawing function, a moving image data separation function, and a video decoding function. The VDP91AK132 may be a GPU (Graphics Processing Unit), a GCL (Graphics Controller LSI), or a microprocessor for image processing generally called a DSP (Digital Signal Processor).

The instruction decoder 91AK141 decodes the instruction unit (instruction code) included in the display control command from the CPU 91AK131, and instructs image processing or the like according to the decoding result. For example, the display control instruction group included in the decoding result is supplied to the internal circuit of the VDP91AK132. The instruction decoder 91AK141 may generate a control signal according to the decoding result and supply it to the internal circuit of the VDP 91AK132. The voice control instruction group included in the decoding result may be supplied to the voice processing circuit 91AK133. The lamp control instruction group included in the decoding result may be supplied to the lamp control circuit 91AK134. The instruction group for motor control included in the decoding result may be supplied to the motor control circuit 91AK135.

The demultiplexer 91AK142 inputs the moving image data read from the effect data memory 91AK123 or the like, and outputs the video data and the audio data separately. The video data output from the demultiplexer 91AK142 is input to the video decoder 91AK143. The audio data output from the demultiplexer 91AK142 is input to the audio decoder 91AK151 of the audio processing circuit 91AK133. The video decoder 91AK143 decompresses and decodes the compressed and encoded video data and outputs the data. The video data output from the video decoder 91AK143 is supplied to the moving image renderer 91AK144. The video decoder 91AK143 may read the compression-encoded character image data or text image data from the effect data memory 91AK123 or the like, decompress and decode it, and then supply the character image renderer 91AK145 or the text image renderer 91AK146.

The moving image renderer 91AK144 writes the video data supplied from the video decoder 91AK143 into a predetermined area of the VRAM 91AK147 and stores it. The moving image renderer 91AK144 executes image processing capable of adjusting the hue, saturation, brightness of the image shown in the image data, or a part or all of them, and temporarily stores the adjusted image data in the VRAM 91AK147. You may. In the character image renderer 91AK145, character image data read from the effect data memory 91AK123 and the like and character image data supplied from the video decoder 91AK143 are input, and are written and stored in a predetermined area of the VRAM 91AK147. The character image renderer 91AK145 may convert the character image data in vector format into a bitmap format and temporarily store it in VRAM 91AK147. Even if the character image renderer 91AK145 executes an image conversion process for displaying the character image specified by the character image designation information in a display mode including the display style and display layout set by the character display setting information. Good. The text image renderer 91AK146 is input with text image data read from the effect data memory 91AK123 and the like and text image data supplied from the video decoder 91AK143, and is written and stored in a predetermined area of the VRAM 91AK147. The text image renderer 91AK146 may convert the text image data in the vector format into a bitmap format and temporarily store the text image data in the VRAM 91AK147. Even if the text image renderer 91AK146 executes an image conversion process for displaying the text image specified by the text image designation information in a display mode including the display style and display layout set by the text display setting information. Good.

The VRAM91AK147 temporarily stores image data and provides a work area for image data processing by the VDP91AK132. The VRAM 91AK147 may be provided with each area such as a palette area in which palette data is arranged, a character buffer in which character image data is stored, a text buffer in which text image data is stored, and a CG buffer. The CG buffer temporarily stores palette data in which the display colors of characters and texts are defined when the drawing process by VDP91AK132 is executed, and temporarily stores the display data of the effect image created by the drawing process. It is used for storage. The display drive circuit 91AK148 is a circuit for outputting signals for displaying various images on the screen of the image display device 5. The display drive circuit 91AK148 outputs a predetermined clock signal (dot clock signal) and scanning signal (drive control signal) to the image display device 5 together with a color signal (gradation control signal) corresponding to the display data created in the VDP 91AK132. do it.

A frame buffer may be provided inside the VRAM 91AK 147 or in a memory module separate from the VRAM 91AK 147, such as the built-in memory 91AK 136. The frame buffer provides a virtual display area in which display data of the effect image created by the drawing process by VDP91AK132 is expanded and stored. The display data stored in the frame buffer is bitmap format image data (pixel data, raster) created by VDP91AK132 based on vector format image data (vector data, vector data) such as points, lines, and polygons. Data) etc. In the frame buffer, for example, an actual display area for storing display data of various images displayed on the screen of the image display device 5 and display data of various images not displayed on the screen of the image display device 5 are stored. The virtual display area to be used may be included. Alternatively, display data for displaying a screen having the same size as the display screen of the image display device 5 is created in the virtual display area of the frame buffer, and the display data in the virtual display area is supplied to the display drive circuit 91AK148. As a result, the data may be output to the image display device 5.

For example, an image display area and an image drawing area are allocated to the storage area of the frame buffer. In the image display area, display data for displaying the effect image on the screen of the image display device 5 is stored. In the image drawing area, the display data of each effect image created by the drawing process is stored. The image display area and the image drawing area may be switched to each other each time a V blank occurs. The V blank occurs at a cycle of updating the image displayed on the screen of the image display device 5. Each time the V-blank is started, a V-blank interrupt signal may be output from the VDP91AK132 to the CPU91AK131, and various interrupt signals may be output from the VDP91AK132 to the CPU91AK131. By switching between the image display area and the image drawing area each time a V-blank occurs, display data of each effect image is created in the storage area allocated as the image drawing area in a certain V-blank cycle (first drawing display period). The drawing process is performed, and in the next V blank period (second drawing display period), this storage area is switched to the image display area. Therefore, the display data created by the drawing process in the first drawing display period is output to the image display device 5 in the second drawing display period, and the image drawing area is allocated in the second drawing display period. In the storage area, the display data created by the drawing process is stored.

The voice processing circuit 91AK133 generates a voice signal that enables voice output using the speakers 8L and 8R based on commands and register settings from the CPU 91AK131 and VDP91AK132. The audio data output from the demultiplexer 91AK142 of the VDP91AK132 is supplied to the audio decoder 91AK151 of the audio processing circuit 91AK133. The voice decoder 91AK151 expands and decodes the compressed and encoded voice data to generate a voice signal. Further, the audio processing circuit 91AK133 may include an audio data memory capable of storing audio data not included in the moving image data in advance. The audio data memory may be provided outside the audio processing circuit 91AK133 by being included in, for example, the effect data memory 91AK123 or ROM91AK124. The voice processing circuit 91AK133 may generate a voice signal by decompressing and decoding the voice data read from the voice data memory based on the instructions and register settings from the CPU 91AK131 and VDP91AK132.

The lamp control circuit 91AK134 controls a lighting mode (light emitting mode) such as lighting, extinguishing, and blinking of a light emitting member such as a game effect lamp 9 or a decorative LED. The lamp control circuit 91AK134 generates lamp control data based on instructions and register settings from the CPU 91AK131 and VDP91AK132, and outputs the lamp control data to the lamp control board 14 and the lamp driver board. The motor control circuit 91AK135 controls operating states such as rotation, stop, rotation speed, and rotation angle (phase) of a drive motor that operably drives a movable member for production such as a movable body 32. The motor control circuit 91AK135 generates motor control data based on instructions and register settings from the CPU 91AK131 and VDP132, and outputs the motor control data to the motor driver board. The built-in memory 91AK136 is a memory circuit built in the effect control microprocessor 91AK100, and can store various data used for controlling the progress of the effect.

FIG. 8-2 shows a configuration example of the storage area for effect control according to the stored contents. In this embodiment, storage areas 91AKM01, 91AKM02, 91AKM11 to 91AKM14 are provided as a plurality of storage areas. Each storage area may be provided so as to be included in, for example, the effect data memory 91AK123, ROM91AKM124, the built-in memory 91AK136, or a part or all of them. The plurality of storage areas include a storage area 91AKM11 for storing data related to moving images and a storage area 91AKM13 for storing data related to text images.

The storage area 91AKM01 stores the effect control program and the effect control management data, and functions as a management area such as a program for effect control. For example, table data, which is configuration data of various tables prepared by CPU 91AK131 of the microprocessor 91AK100 for effect control to perform various determinations, determinations, and settings, pattern data constituting an effect control pattern, and the like are stored as management data in a storage area. It suffices if it is stored in 91AKM01.

The storage area 91AKM02 stores display control programs and display control management data, and functions as a management area for display control programs and the like. For example, an image processing program prepared for the VDP91AK132 of the effect control microprocessor 91AK100 to perform various image processing, a display process table in which procedures for displaying the effect image, etc. are defined are stored in the storage area 91AKM02. You just have to. The image processing program may include a program that converts image data in vector format into image data in bitmap format. The image processing program may include a program that generates a text image in a bitmap format based on the text described using the character code and the font data.

The storage area 91AKM11 stores moving image-related data including moving image data and related data. For the moving image data, image compression information including a reference image and a predicted image is generated by compression coding processing such as motion compensation prediction coding using a multi-frame image as an original image, and is multiplexed with audio data. It may be a multi-coded stream. The moving image-related data stored in the storage area 91AKM11 may include table data and data files constituting the moving image display process table. The moving image display process table is a display control process that can change the display content and display mode of the moving image to be displayed on the screen of the image display device 5 according to the elapsed time as the production of the pachinko gaming machine 1 progresses. Used. The display content of the moving image is the content of the moving image that is reproduced and displayed corresponding to the moving image data. The display mode of the moving image is a mode and a form when the moving image is reproduced and displayed, including the display style and the display layout of the moving image. The table data and data files constituting the moving image display process table may be stored in the storage area 91AKM02 as display control management data.

The storage area 91AKM12 stores character image-related data including character image data and its related data. The character image data may be any still image data in which any character image showing a plurality of types of decorative patterns, people, figures, symbols, etc. is described in a vector format or a bitmap format. The character image-related data stored in the storage area 91AKM12 may include table data and a data file constituting the character display process table. The character display process table is used for display control processing in which the display content and display mode of the character image to be displayed on the screen of the image display device 5 can be changed according to the elapsed time as the effect of the pachinko gaming machine 1 progresses. Be done. The display content of the character image is the content of the character image displayed corresponding to the character image data. The display mode of the character image is a mode and form for displaying the character image, including the display style and display layout of the character image. The table data and data files constituting the character display process table may be stored in the storage area 91AKM02 as display control management data.

The storage area 91AKM13 stores text image-related data including text image data and its related data. The text image-related data may include outline font data. Outline font data is data that can be converted into the glyph of each character in bitmap format image data by specifying a combination of multiple vertex coordinates that connect contours for each character used to display a text image. is there. The text image-related data may include vector font data or stroke font data in place of the outline font data or together with the outline font data. Vector font data and stroke font data are data that can be converted into glyphs of each character in bitmap format image data by specifying straight line and curve parameters for each character used to display a text image. .. Outline fonts and vector fonts are included in scalable fonts whose quality does not easily deteriorate even when the font is scaled up or down. The text image data indicates a text image that constitutes a character string that is a combination of a plurality of character images, and is an arbitrarily set word such as a sentence, a paragraph, a sentence, a phrase, a word, or a combination of a part or all of them. Any unit may be used as long as it can recognize the unit of. Further, the text image data may indicate a text image consisting of only a single character image. The text image displayed on the screen of the image display device 5 using the text image data may indicate telop characters, subtitles, other information transmission characters, or the like. It may indicate a decorative character. Since the text image data is included in the effect data for displaying the text image, it may be stored in the effect data memory 91AK123. On the other hand, font data such as outline font data may be stored in either the ROM 91AK 124 or the built-in memory 91AK 136 because the VDP91AK132 is used when executing the image processing program. As described above, the storage area 91AKM13 may be provided in the effect data memory 91AK123 and the ROM 91AK124 or the built-in memory 91AK136. Similarly, other storage areas may be provided in a part or all of a plurality of memory devices such as the effect data memory 91AK123, ROM91AKM124, and built-in memory 91AK136.

The text image-related data stored in the storage area 91AKM 13 may include table data and a data file constituting the text display process table. The text display process table is used for display control processing in which the display content and display mode of the text image displayed on the screen of the image display device 5 can be changed according to the elapsed time as the effect of the pachinko gaming machine 1 progresses. Be done. The display content of the text image is the content of the text image displayed corresponding to the text image data. The display mode of the text image is a mode or form when displaying the character image, including the display style and display layout of the text image. The table data and data files constituting the text display process table may be stored in the storage area 91AKM02 as display control management data.

The storage area 91AKM14 stores voice-related data including voice data and its related data. The audio data stored in the storage area 91AKM14 is different from the audio that is reproduced and output in synchronization with the image in the effect of the moving image display, and any sound can be reproduced and output as the effect of the pachinko gaming machine 1 progresses. Anything that does. The audio-related data stored in the storage area 91AKM 14 may include table data and data files that constitute the audio output process table. The voice output process table is used for voice control processing in which the voices such as sound effects and music output from the speakers 8L and 8R can be changed according to the elapsed time as the production in the pachinko gaming machine 1 progresses. The table data and data files constituting the audio output process table may be stored in the storage area 91AKM01 as the effect control management data.

In the VDP91AK132 of the effect control microprocessor 91AK100, the moving image data read from the storage area 91AKM11 is input to the demultiplexer 91AK142, and is separated into video data and audio data. The video data is input to the video decoder 91AK143, and the audio data is input to the audio decoder 91AK151 of the audio processing circuit 91AK133. The video decoder 91AK143 decompresses and decodes the compressed and encoded video data and supplies it to the moving image renderer 91AK144. The moving image renderer 91AK144 executes, for example, conversion processing of video data according to a display mode including a display style and a display layout of a moving image, and writes and stores the converted data in a predetermined area of the VRAM 91AK147. In this way, the display of the moving image is controlled by using the moving image data which is the stored data of the storage area 91AKM11.

In the VDP91AK132 of the effect control microprocessor 91AK100, the text image data read from the storage area 91AKM13 is input to the text image renderer 91AK146. When the text image data is compressed and encoded, it may be decompressed and decoded by the video decoder 91AK143 and then input to the text image renderer 91AK146. The text image renderer 91AK146 executes, for example, a conversion process of text image data according to a display mode including a display style and a display layout of the text image, and writes the converted data in a predetermined area of the VRAM 91AK147 and stores it. In this way, the display of the text image is controlled by using the text image data which is the stored data of the storage area 91AKM13.

FIG. 8-3 shows an example of determining the moving image data and the text display process table according to the reach effect content. In the reach effect of super reach such as SP reach A and SP reach B, it is possible to execute an effect by displaying a moving image using moving image data and an effect by displaying a text image using text image data. The period in which the effect of displaying the moving image is executed and the period in which the effect of displaying the text image is executed may be partly or wholly the same period or may include different periods. The text display process table is a table in which process data used for display control is set, for example, when displaying a text image in which a plurality of character images are combined.

In the determination example shown in FIG. 8-3, the moving image data 91AKD01, 91AKD02, 91AKD11, and 91AKD12 are determined according to the reach effect content, and the text display process table 91AKT01, 91AKT02, 91AKT11, and 91AKT12 are determined. Will be done. Of these, the moving image data is determined in a one-to-one correspondence with the reach effect content. For example, when the reach effect content is "SP reach A (big hit)", the moving image data 91AKD01 is determined. When the reach effect content is "SP reach B (big hit)", the moving image data 91AKD02 is determined. When the reach effect content is "SP reach A (loss)", the moving image data 91AKD11 is determined. When the reach effect content is "SP reach B (loss)", the moving image data 91AKD12 is determined. On the other hand, in the text display process table, there are cases where it is possible to determine in common even with different reach effect contents, and there are cases where it cannot be determined. For example, when the reach effect content is "SP reach A (big hit)", the determination ratio of the text display process table 91AKT01 is 30/100, and the determination ratio of the text display process table 91AKT02 is 70/100. When the reach effect content is "SP reach B (big hit)", the determination ratio of the text display process table 91AKT11 is 20/100, and the determination ratio of the text display process table 91AKT12 is 80/100. When the reach effect content is "SP reach A (loss)", the determination ratio of the text display process table 91AKT01 is 80/100, and the determination ratio of the text display process table 91AKT02 is 20/100. When the reach effect content is "SP reach B (loss)", the determination ratio of the text display process table 91AKT11 is 70/100, and the determination ratio of the text display process table 91AKT12 is 30/100.

The text display process tables 91AKT01 and 91AKT02 can be determined when the reach effect content is "SP reach A (big hit)" or "SP reach A (loss)", and the reach effect content is "SP reach B (big hit)" or In the case of "SP reach B (loss)", it cannot be determined. The text display process tables 91AKT11 and 91AKT12 can be determined when the reach effect content is "SP reach B (big hit)" or "SP reach B (loss)", and the reach effect content is "SP reach A (big hit)" or In the case of "SP reach A (loss)", it cannot be determined. As described above, the text display process tables 91AKT01 and 91AKT02 are used to control the display of the text image when the reach effect of the SP reach A is executed. The text display process tables 91AKT11 and 91AKT12 are used to control the display of the text image when the reach effect of the SP reach B is executed.

When the reach effect content is "SP reach A (big hit)", the effect by moving image display using the moving image data 91AKD01 is executed, and when the reach effect content is "SP reach A (loss)", the moving image is executed. An effect by displaying a moving image using the data 91AKD11 is executed. A text image using either the text display process table 91AKT01 or 91AKT02 is added to the moving image displayed using the moving image data 91AKD01 and the moving image displayed using the moving image data 91AKD11. It can be displayed. When the reach effect content is "SP reach B (big hit)", the effect by moving image display using the moving image data 91AKD02 is executed, and when the reach effect content is "SP reach B (loss)", the moving image is executed. An effect by displaying a moving image using the data 91AKD12 is executed. A text image using either the text display process table 91AKT11 or 91AKT12 is added to the moving image displayed using the moving image data 91AKD02 and the moving image displayed using the moving image data 91AKD12. It can be displayed. Therefore, it is possible to add and display a text image using a common text display process table to a plurality of moving images displayed using different moving image data.

FIG. 8-4 shows a configuration example of the text display process table. Of these, FIG. 8-4 (A1) shows a configuration example of the text display process table 91AKT01 that can be used corresponding to the reach effect of SP reach A, and FIG. 8-4 (A2) shows the reach of SP reach A. A configuration example of the text display process table 91AKT02 that can be used in response to the effect is shown. FIG. 8-4 (B) shows a configuration example of the text display process table 91AKT11 that can be used in response to the reach effect of SP reach B.

In each text display process table, text image designation information and text display setting information are set in association with each other in a plurality of text display periods. The text display process table may include a single text display period in which the text image designation information and the text display setting information are set in association with each other. For the text display period, a start time for starting the display and an end time for ending the display are specified for each text image to be displayed. The start time and end time in the text display period may be specified by using the elapsed time from the start of displaying the moving image in the reach effect, or by using the elapsed time from the start of the variable display. You may. However, if the displayed content of the text image is highly relevant to the displayed content of the moving image, the start time and end time in the text display period will be used using the elapsed time since the display of the moving image was started. It is desirable to specify. Since the elapsed time from the start of the variable display includes, for example, the elapsed time before the variable display becomes the reach mode, the moving image even if it is a common reach effect due to the variable display effect before the variable display becomes the reach mode. The timing at which the display of is started may be different. Even in such a case, if the start time and end time in the text display period are specified by using the elapsed time from the start of displaying the moving image, the timing at which the specific image in the moving image is displayed and the timing. The timing at which a specific text image is displayed can be easily synchronized, and the interlocking between the display of the moving image and the display of the text image can be enhanced. The text image designation information specifies the text image data used for displaying the text image so as to be identifiable. For example, the text image designation information may be any information that specifies the storage address, read address, data size, etc. of the text image data in the storage area 91AKM13. Alternatively, the text image specification information uses an arbitrary character code such as ASCII code, UNICODE (UTF-16 or UTF-8, etc.), JIS code (Shift_JIS code, etc.), and the content of the text image to be displayed. May be the information that identifies. The text display setting information is information that specifies that the display mode of the text image can be set by the display style information, the display layout information, and other metadata of the text image to be displayed. The text display process table may be described using a predetermined markup language such as TTML (Timed Text Markup Language). In addition, the text display process table may be set in association with the text image designation information and the text display setting information during the text display period by using arbitrary table data.

FIG. 8-5 shows an example of display control of a text image using a text display process table. Of these, FIG. 8-5 (A1) shows an example of display control in the case of the text display process table 91AKT01, and FIG. 8-5 (A2) shows an example of display control in the case of the text display process table 91AKT02. .. FIG. 8-5 (B) shows an example of display control in the case of the text display process table 91AKT11. In these display control examples, when the reach effect of SP reach A is executed, the display of the moving image is started at the timing T00, and when the reach effect of SP reach B is executed, the timing T10 is used. At some point, the display of the moving image starts.

In the case of the text display process table 91AKT01 shown in FIG. 8-4 (A1), as shown in FIG. 8-5 (A1), the text image designation information 91AKA01 is displayed during the text display period from timing T01 to timing T05. Display the text image specified by. Further, the text image specified by the text image designation information 91AKA02 is displayed in the text display period from the timing T02 to the timing T03, and the text image designated by the text image designation information 91AKA03 in the text display period from the timing T04 to the timing T05. Is displayed. The timings T02 to T04 are all included in the period from the timing T01 to the timing T05. After the timing T05 has elapsed, the text image specified by the text image designation information 91AKA04 is displayed in the text display period from the timing T06 to the timing T08, and the text image designation information 91AKA05 is displayed in the text display period from the timing T07 to the timing T09. Display the text image specified by. The timing T08 is a timing that arrives after the timing T07.

In the case of the text display process table 91AKT02 shown in FIG. 8-4 (A2), as shown in FIG. 8-5 (A2), the text image designation information 91AKA01 during the text display period from timing T01 to timing T05. Display the text image specified by. Further, the text image specified by the text image designation information 91AKA02 is displayed in the text display period from the timing T02 to the timing T03, and the text image designated by the text image designation information 91AKA13 in the text display period from the timing T04 to the timing T05. Is displayed. After the timing T05 has elapsed, the text image specified by the text image designation information 91AKA14 is displayed in the text display period from the timing T06 to the timing T08, and the text image designation information 91AKA05 is displayed in the text display period from the timing T07 to the timing T09. Display the text image specified by.

In this way, the text image designated by the text image designation information can be displayed on the screen of the image display device 5 corresponding to the plurality of text display periods set by the text display process table. The first text display period included in the plurality of text display periods may include a second text display period different from the first text display period and a period partially or wholly in common. For example, in the text display process table 91AKT01 and the text display process table 91AKT02, in the first text display period from timing T01 to timing T05, the second text display period from timing T02 to timing T03, and the second text display period from timing T04 to timing T05. It is set to include 3 text display periods. In this case, a part of the first text display period is common to the second text display period, and a part of the other period is common to the third text display period. As described above, the first text display period includes a period partially common to the second text display period, and includes a period partially common to the third text display period. On the other hand, in the second text display period, the entire period is common to the first text display period, and in the third text display period, the entire period is common to the first text display period. As described above, the second text display period includes the entire period in the first text display period, and the third text display period includes the entire period in the first text display period. Further, the text display period from timing T06 to timing T08 and the text display period from timing T07 to timing T09 include a period in which a part is common to each other. As described above, the first text display period may include a part of the second text display period, and the second text display period may include a part of the first text display period. Alternatively, the first text display period may include the entire period in the second text display period, and the second text display period may include the entire period in the first text display period.

By setting in the text display process table, it is possible to display different text images specified by the text image designation information according to a plurality of text display periods. As a result, during the display period of the text image added to the moving image, the first component related to the display content of the text image among the plurality of components in the display of the text image can be changed according to the elapsed time. become. For example, according to the settings in the text display process table 91AKT01 and the text display process table 91AKT02, the text image designated by the text image designation information 91AKA01 is displayed in the first text display period from the timing T01 to the timing T05. As the second text display period included in the first text display period, the text image designated by the text image designation information 91AKA02 is displayed in the text display period from the timing T02 to the timing T03. After the second text display period ends at the timing T03, as the third text display period included in the first text display period, in the text display period from the timing T04 to the timing T05, the text image designation information 91AKA03 or the text The text image designated by the image designation information 91AKA13 is displayed. With such a setting, only the text image specified by the text image designation information 91AKA01 is displayed in the period from timing T01 to timing T02 and the period from timing T03 to timing T04 in the first text display period. .. On the other hand, in the period from timing T02 to timing T03, which is common to the second text display period, in the first text display period, the text image is designated for the display of the first text image designated by the text image designation information 91AKA01. The display of the text image is changed so that the display of the second text image specified by the information 91AKA02 is added. On the other hand, in the period from the timing T04 to the timing T05, which is common to the third text display period, in the first text display period, the text image designation information is displayed on the display of the first text image designated by the text image designation information 91AKA01. The display of the text image is changed so that the display of the third text image designated by 91AKA03 or the display of the fourth text image designated by the text image designation information 91AKA13 is added. In this case, the display of the text image added to the display of the first text image is such that either the third text image or the fourth text image is displayed depending on the determination result of the text display process table. It will be possible to change.

In the text display process table 91AKT01 and the text display process table 91AKT02, the text image specified by the common text image designation information 91AKA01 is displayed in the text display period from the timing T01 to the timing T05, and the text from the timing T02 to the timing T03 is displayed. The text image designated by the common text image designation information 91AKA02 is displayed during the display period. On the other hand, in the text display period from timing T04 to timing T05, the text image specified by the text image designation information 91AKA03 is displayed in the case of the text display process table 91AKT01, and the text is displayed in the case of the text display process table 91AKT02. Image designation information 91 The text image designated by AKA13 is displayed. The text display process table 91AKT01 and the text display process table 91AKT02 can be determined corresponding to the common moving image data 91AKD01 and 91AKD11. Therefore, even when a moving image using common moving image data is displayed, the text image to be displayed is different in at least a part of the plurality of text display periods, so that the text image can be displayed. The components can be changed. When a moving image using common moving image data is displayed, the text image to be displayed may be different in the entire plurality of text display periods according to the determination result of the text display process table. Good. When a moving image using common moving image data is displayed, if the start time, end time, and part or all of the period length are different for multiple text display periods, depending on the determination result of the text display process table. You may let me. In this way, a part or all of the display period for displaying the text image added to the moving image of 1 may be changed, or a part or all of the text image added to the moving image of 1 can be changed. May be.

In the case of the text display process table 91AKT11 shown in FIG. 8-4 (B), as shown in FIG. 8-5 (B), the text image designation information 91AKA21 is displayed during the text display period from timing T11 to timing T15. Display the text image specified by. Further, the text image specified by the text image designation information 91AKA22 is displayed in the text display period from the timing T11 to the timing T12, and the text image designated by the text image designation information 91AKA23 in the text display period from the timing T13 to the timing T14. Is displayed. The timings T12 to T14 are all included in the period from the timing T11 to the timing T15. After the timing T15 has elapsed, the text image specified by the text image designation information 91AKA24 is displayed in the text display period from the timing T16 to the timing T17, and the text image designation information 91AKA25 is displayed in the text display period from the timing T18 to the timing T19. Display the text image specified by.

FIG. 8-6 shows a specific example of the text display setting information. The text display setting information is configured to include data corresponding to a plurality of fields such as origin, fontFamily, fontSize, fontWeight, color, backgroundColor, fontStyle, textAlign, and textDecoration. In the origin field, the origin coordinates when displaying a text image can be set. In the fontFamily field, the font family that is the font type can be set for the font of the characters included in the text image. In the fontSize field, you can set the font size that is the size to display the text image. The fontWeight field allows you to set the thickness of the characters contained in the text image. In the color field, the display color of the characters included in the text image can be set. The backgroundColor field can set the display color of the background in the text image. The fontStyle field allows you to set the style of characters in text images such as standard, italic, or italic. The textAlign field allows you to set the alignment of characters contained in a text image, such as right-justified, centered, and left-justified. The textDecoration field can be set to display decorations added to the text image, such as underlines, overlines, strikethroughs, and other effect images. In this way, the text display setting information makes it possible to set the display mode of the text image, such as the display style and display layout of the text image.

FIG. 8-6 (A) shows a configuration example of the text display setting information 91AKB01. FIG. 8-6 (B) shows a configuration example of the text display setting information 91AKB02. FIG. 8-6 (C1) shows a configuration example of the text display setting information 91AKB03. FIG. 8-6 (C2) shows a configuration example of the text display setting information 91AKB13. The text display setting information 91AKB01 is included in the text display process tables 91AKT01, 91AKT02, and 91AKT11. The text display setting information 91AKB02 is included in the text display process tables 91AKT01, 91AKT02, and 91AKT11. The text display setting information 91AKB03 is included in the text display process tables 91AKT01 and 91AKT11, but is not included in the text display process table 91AKT02. The text display setting information 91AKB13 is included in the text display process table 91AKT02, but is not included in the text display process tables 91AKT01 and 91AKT11.

In the plurality of text display periods set by the text display process table, the text image specified by the text image designation information is displayed on the screen of the image display device 5 in the display style and display layout set by the text display setting information. Can be displayed on. This makes it possible to change the second component related to the display mode of the text image among the plurality of components in the display of the text image during the display period of the text image added to the moving image according to the elapsed time. become. For example, according to the settings in the text display process table 91AKT01 and the text display process table 91AKT02, the text image specified by the text image designation information 91AKA01 is set by the text display setting information 91AKB01 in the first text display period from timing T01 to timing T05. It is displayed with the displayed display style and display layout. As the second text display period included in the first text display period, in the text display period from timing T02 to timing T03, the text image designated by the text image designation information 91AKA02 was set by the text display setting information 91AKAB02. It is displayed in the display style and display layout. After the second text display period ends at timing T03, the text display period from timing T04 to timing T05 is designated by the text image designation information 91AKA03 as the third text display period included in the first text display period. When the text image is displayed with the display style and display layout set by the text display setting information 91AKA3, and when the text image specified by the text image specification information 91AKA13 is displayed with the text display setting information 91AKA13. Or may be displayed in the display layout. With such a setting, in the period from timing T01 to timing T02 and the period from timing T03 to timing T04 in the first text display period, only the text image specified by the text image designation information 91AKA01 is displayed as text. It is displayed in the display style and display layout set by the setting information 91AKB01. On the other hand, in the period from timing T02 to timing T03, which is common to the second text display period, in the first text display period, the text image is added to the display of the text image designated by the text image designation information 91AKA01. The display of the text image is changed so that the text image specified by the designated information 91AKA02 is displayed in the display style and display layout set by the text display setting information 91AKA02. On the other hand, in the period from the timing T04 to the timing T05, which is common to the third text display period, in the first text display period, the text image is designated by being added to the display of the text image specified by the text image designation information 91AKA01. When the text image specified by the information 91AKA03 is displayed in the display style and display layout set by the text display setting information 91AKA3, and the text image specified by the text image specification information 91AKA13 is displayed by the text display setting information 91AKAB13. The display of the text image is changed so that it may be displayed with the displayed display style and display layout.

In the second text display period from timing T02 to timing T03, the text image specified by the text image designation information 91AKA02 is different from the display style and display layout set by the text display setting information 91AKAB01, and the text display setting information 91AKAB02 It can be displayed with the display style and display layout set by. In the third text display period from timing T04 to timing T05, the text image specified by the text image designation information 91AKA03 is different from the display style and display layout set by the text display setting information 91AKAB01, and the text display setting information 91AKAB03 It may be displayed with the display style and display layout set by. Alternatively, in the third text display period from timing T04 to timing T05, the text image specified by the text image designation information 91AKA13 is set to display the text, unlike the display style and display layout set by the text display setting information 91AKAB01. It may be displayed in the display style and display layout set by the information 91AKB13. As described above, in the first text display period from timing T01 to timing T05, which is common to the second text display period from timing T02 to timing T03, the text image designated by the text image designation information 91AKA01 is used. In addition to displaying in one display mode, the text image designated by the text image designation information 91AKA02 can be changed to a second display mode different from the first display mode and displayed. Of the first text display period from timing T01 to timing T05, in the period common to the third text display period from timing T04 to timing T05, the text image designated by the text image designation information 91AKA01 is displayed in the first display mode. In addition to displaying, the text image designated by the text image designation information 91AKA03 may be changed to a third display mode different from the first display mode and the second display mode and displayed. Alternatively, in the first text display period from timing T01 to timing T05, which is common to the third text display period from timing T04 to timing T05, the text image designated by the text image designation information 91AKA01 is first displayed. In addition to displaying in a mode, the text image designated by the text image designation information 91AKA13 may be changed to a fourth display mode different from the first to third display modes and displayed. Therefore, during the display period of the text image added to the moving image, some text images can be changed to a display mode different from other text images and displayed. Further, after displaying the text image of the second display mode together with the text image of the first display mode, the text image of the second display mode is changed to the text image of the third display mode and displayed, and the second display. The display mode of the text image can be changed and displayed so that the text image of the mode may be changed to the text image of the fourth display mode and displayed.

In the text display process table 91AKT01 shown in FIG. 8-4 (A1) and the text display process table 91AKT02 shown in FIG. 8-4 (A2), a text image is displayed in the text display period from timing T01 to timing T05. The text image designated by the designated information 91AKA01 is displayed in the display mode set by the text display setting information 91AKA01. Further, in the text display period from the timing T02 to the timing T03, the text image designated by the text image designation information 91AKA02 is displayed in the display mode set by the text display setting information 91AKAB02. As a result, a common text image can be displayed in a common display mode. On the other hand, in the text display process table 91AKT01, the text image designated by the text image designation information 91AKA03 is displayed in the display mode set by the text display setting information 91AKB03 in accordance with the text display period from the timing T04 to the timing T05. Display it. In the text display process table 91AKT02, the text image designated by the text image designation information 91AKA13 is displayed in the display mode set by the text display setting information 91AKB13 corresponding to the text display period from the timing T04 to the timing T05. As a result, different text images can be displayed in different display modes. On the other hand, in the text display process table 91AKT11, the text image designated by the text image designation information 91AKA21 is displayed in the display mode set by the text display setting information 91AKB01 in accordance with the text display period from the timing T11 to the timing T15. Display it. Further, the text image designated by the text image designation information 91AKA22 is displayed in the display mode set by the text display setting information 91AKAB02 corresponding to the text display period from the timing T11 to the timing T12. In this case, the text image designated by the text image designation information 91AKA21 can be displayed in the same display mode as the text image designated by the text image designation information 91AKA01. Further, the text image designated by the text image designation information 91AKA22 can be displayed in the same display mode as the text image designated by the text image designation information 91AKA02. In this way, even different text images added to different moving images may be displayed in a common display mode according to the setting data based on the common text display setting information. Alternatively, in the text display process table 91AKT01, the text image specified by the text image designation information 91AKA05 is displayed in the display mode set by the text display setting information 91AKB05 corresponding to the text display period from the timing T07 to the timing T09. Let me. In the text display process table 91AKT02, the text image designated by the text image designation information 91AKA05 is displayed in the display mode set by the text display setting information 91AKB15 corresponding to the text display period from the timing T07 to the timing T09. In this way, even a common text image may be displayed in a different display mode depending on the text display setting information.

In the text display process table, text image designation information and text display setting information are set in association with each other in a plurality of text display periods. Further, in a plurality of text display process tables, at least a part of the text image designation information and the text display setting information set in association with the plurality of text display periods can be set as common information. , Part or all of the information can be set as different information. With these settings, the first component and the second component related to the text image, such as the display content and display mode of the text image, can be individually changed and displayed.

In the text display setting information 91AKB01 shown in FIG. 8-6 (A), the display color of the text image is set to change stepwise from # FF0040 to # 4000FF by the color field. The text display process table 91AKT01 shown in FIG. 8-4 (A1) and the text display process table 91AKT02 shown in FIG. 8-4 (A2) display text in the text display period from timing T01 to timing T05. The text image of the display mode set by the setting information 91AKB01 is displayed. In the text display process table 91AKT11 shown in FIG. 8-4 (B), the text image of the display mode set by the text display setting information 91AKB01 is displayed in the text display period from the timing T11 to the timing T15. In these cases, when the text image of the display mode set by the text display setting information 91AKB01 is displayed as a text image corresponding to the display content that is the common first component in the corresponding text display period, The display mode, which is the second component of the text image, such as the display color of the text image, can be changed according to the elapsed time. For example, the display color of the text image set by the color field may be changed even when the same text image is specified by the text image designation information, depending on the reach effect content and the like. .. In this case, whether or not to change the display color of the text image at a different rate depending on whether or not it is controlled in an advantageous state, for example, whether or not the display result of the variable display is a "big hit". It may be determined, or it may be determined to be one of a plurality of display colors. Further, for example, the display color of the text image set by the color field is changed according to the execution result of the effect control program by the CPU 91AK131 even when the same text image is specified by the text image designation information. It may be possible. In this case, the VDP91AK132 may change the display color of the text image set by the color field to a different display color based on the display control command from the CPU91AK131, the register setting, and the like. In this way, the display mode such as the display style of the text image can be changed by simply changing a part of the data related to the text image included in the text display process table, so that the increase in data capacity and the increase in processing load can be prevented. , Various text images can be displayed. When changing the display color of the text image, other display styles may be changed accordingly. For example, when the display color of the text image is white, the display of the text image is easy for the player to see, and when the display color of the text image is red, the display of the text image is difficult for the player to recognize. Tend. Therefore, when the display color of the text image is changed to red, the text image set by, for example, the fontSize field is displayed so that the font size is larger than that when the display color of the text image is white. The size may be changed. As a specific example, a text image displayed with a font size of 10.5px when the display color is white is displayed with a font size of 11px when the display color is changed to red. It would be nice if it could be changed to. This makes it possible to display a text image that is easy for the player to see while suppressing the player's discomfort in displaying the text image.

FIG. 8-7 shows an execution example of an effect in which a text image is displayed using the text display process table. In this execution example, the text image is displayed according to a plurality of text display periods in accordance with the moving image display when the reach effect of SP reach A is executed. In the reach effect of SP Reach A, when the display result of the variable display is "big hit", the moving image is displayed using the moving image data 91AKD01, and when the display result of the variable display is "missing", the moving image is displayed. A moving image is displayed using the data 91AKD11. In the moving image display using the moving image data 91AKD01 and the moving image display using the moving image data 91AKD11, a production display that is a battle effect in which a common ally character and an enemy character compete with each other is performed, for example, the battle result is Until the timing of notification, the contents of the common effect display may be used. Further, when the display result of the variable display is "big hit", the determination ratio of the text display process table 91AKT02 is high, and when the display result of the variable display is "missing", the determination ratio of the text display process table 91AKT01 is high. Will be higher. Therefore, in the reach effect of SP Reach A, even during the moving image display period, which is the content of the common effect display, the jackpot expectation is different depending on the display content of the text image according to the text display process table. Can be done.

The effect execution example 91AKAD11 shown in FIG. 8-7 (A) is an effect content common to the text display process tables 91AKT01 and 91AKT02, and corresponds to the text display period from the timing T01 to the timing T05, and the text image designation information 91AKA01. The text image specified by is displayed in the display mode set by the text display setting information 91AKB01. In this case, the text image indicating the reach name "SP reach A" specified by the text image designation information 91AKA01 has, for example, the origin coordinates (300, 30) as the display mode set by the text display setting information 91AKAB01. A typeface whose font family is classified into Gothic typeface called AA_gothic, font size is 48px, bold line width corresponding to bold character thickness, text image display color gradually changes from # FF0040 to # 4000FF, The components in the text image display are controlled so that the background display color is # CCF0F0, the font style is italic or italic corresponding to italic, the font alignment is centered, and the font decoration is unset. In the effect control microprocessor 91AK100, if the text image renderer 91AK146 of the VDP91AK132 executes an image conversion process for displaying a text image in a display mode including a display style and a display layout specified by the text display designation information. Good.

Further, in the effect execution example 91AKAD11 shown in FIG. 8-7 (A), the text image designated by the text image designation information 91AKA02 corresponds to the text display period from the timing T02 to the timing T03, and the text image is the text display setting information 91AKAB02. It is displayed in the display mode set by. In this case, the text image indicating the line "If this character wins ..." specified by the text image designation information 91AKA02 has a display mode set by the text display setting information 91AKA02, for example, the origin coordinate is (250,600). ), Font family is BB_mincho, a typeface classified as Mincho typeface, font size is 36px, normal line width corresponding to normal character thickness, text image display color is #FFFFFF, background display color is # 220C0C , The components in the display of the text image are controlled so that the normal font corresponding to the normal character style, the character arrangement is left-justified, and the character decoration is not set.

The effect execution example 91AKD21 shown in FIG. 8-7 (B1) includes an effect content different from that of the text display process table 91AKT02 when the text display process table 91AKT01 is used, and during the text display period from timing T04 to timing T05. Correspondingly, the text image designated by the text image designation information 91AKA03 is displayed in the display mode set by the text display setting information 91AKA03. In this case, the text image indicating the line "chance !!" specified by the text image designation information 91AKA03 has, for example, the origin coordinate (250,600) and the font family as the display mode set by the text display setting information 91AKAB03. Typeface classified into Gothic typeface called CC_gothic, font size is 60px, normal line width corresponding to normal character thickness, text image display color is # 000000, background display color is #FFFFFF, character style is normal The components in the text image are controlled so that the corresponding normal font, character placement is centered, and character decoration is unset. This text image has the same origin coordinates and character decoration as the text image specified by the text image designation information 91AKA02, and has a font family, font size, character thickness, text image display color, and background display. The color, character style, and character arrangement have been changed. In this way, when the text image specified by the text image designation information is displayed, some of the data corresponding to the plurality of fields included in the text display setting information may be changed and displayed. ..

The effect execution example 91AKD22 shown in FIG. 8-7 (B2) includes an effect content different from that of the text display process table 91AKT01 when the text display process table 91AKT02 is used, and during the text display period from timing T04 to timing T05. Correspondingly, the text image designated by the text image designation information 91AKA13 is displayed in the display mode set by the text display setting information 91AKA13. In this case, the text image indicating the line "super hot" specified by the text image designation information 91AKA13 has, for example, the origin coordinate (250,600) and the font family DD_mincho as the display mode set by the text display setting information 91AKAB13. Typeface classified as Mincho typeface, font size is 72px, character thickness is bold corresponding to bold, text image display color is gold corresponding to "gold", background display color is # 000000, The components in the text image are controlled so that the character style is the normal typeface corresponding to normal, the character arrangement is the center, and the character decoration is the effect display setting for gold display by effect_gold. Compared with the text image specified by the text image designation information 91AKA02, this text image has only the origin coordinates in common, and the font family, font size, character thickness, text image display color, background display color, etc. The character style, character arrangement, and character decoration have been changed. In this way, when displaying the text image specified by the text image specification information, the data to be changed and the data not to be changed are individually set among the data corresponding to the plurality of fields included in the text display setting information. It may be possible. Compared with the text image designated by the text image designation information 91AKA01, all the settings of this text image, including the origin coordinates, have been changed. In this way, when the text image designated by the text image designation information is displayed, all of the data corresponding to the plurality of fields included in the text display setting information may be changed and displayed. When displaying the text image specified by the text image specification information, if 1 data is changed and displayed among the data corresponding to the plurality of fields included in the text display setting information, 1 data is displayed. Other data associated in advance may also be modified and displayed. For example, when the display color of a text image is changed to gold corresponding to "gold" and displayed, it is sufficient that the character decoration can be changed to the effect display setting for gold display by effect_gold and displayed.

As for the display color and background display color of the text image, for each display color of R (red), G (green), and B (blue), for example, the brightness (gradation) is any one of "0" to "255". It can be set in 256 steps so that it becomes a level. In the text display setting information, the field data constituting the color field and the backgroundColor field has a data format common to the field data constituting the color field and the backgroundColor field in the character display setting information used for displaying the character image, for example. You just have to. Further, the origin coordinates when displaying a text image can be set by a combination of the x-coordinate in the horizontal direction and the y-coordinate in the vertical direction on the screen of the image display device 5. In the text display setting information, the field data constituting the origin field may have a data format common to the field data constituting the origin field in the character display setting information, for example. In this way, some or all of the field data included in the text display setting information is common data with the field data included in the setting information used for displaying the effect image different from the text image, such as the character display setting information. It may have a format. With such text display setting information, it is sufficient that the second component related to the text image, such as the display style and display layout of the text image, can be changed by using the information common to the effect image different from the text image. As a result, it is possible to reduce the processing load of changing the second component related to the text image, such as the display style and display layout of the text image.

The font family that can be set when displaying a text image is not set when displaying a character image. In the text display setting information, the field data constituting the fontFamily field may be any unique field data not included in the character display setting information. Further, instead of the font size that can be set when displaying a text image, the character size may be set when displaying a character image. In the text display setting information, the field data constituting the fontSize field corresponds to the field data constituting the characterSize field in the character display setting information, but may have a unique field format. In this way, some or all of the field data included in the text display setting information is different from the field data included in the setting information used for displaying the effect image different from the text image, such as the character display setting information. It may have a data format. With such text display setting information, it is possible to change the second component related to the text image, such as the display style and display layout of the text image, by using unique information that is not used in the effect image different from the text image. May be good. As a result, it is possible to flexibly change the second component related to the text image, such as the display style and display layout of the text image, to display various text images.

When, for example, a gold color corresponding to "gold" is set as the display color of the text image, the character decoration becomes the effect display setting for the gold color display by effect_gold. When "gold" is set by the color field in the text display setting information, effect_gold is set by the textDecoration field to display a glossy text image and display gold around the text image. It is possible to add an effect image for display. In the effect execution example 91AKD22 shown in FIG. 8-7 (B2), when a specific text image indicating a line of "super hot" is specified by the text image designation information 91A13, the text display setting information 91AKB13 is used for gold display. By setting the display style of, a specific text image showing the line "super hot" is displayed with gloss, and an effect image for gold display is displayed around the specific text image. .. As a result, it is possible to appropriately control the display so as to enhance the impression of the player on the display of the text image and improve the interest of the effect by the text image display.

In the pachinko gaming machine 1, when the effect of the moving image display using the moving image data is executed, the player can easily recognize the effect content by adding the effect of the text image display using the text image data. As a result, it becomes easier to provide information that is different from the content of the production. In this case, in the data configuration in which the text image data is compressed, encoded, and multiplexed as the video data included in the moving image data, the outline is displayed in the text image display using the text image data that has been decompressed and decoded and reproduced. There is a risk of problems such as blurring and deterioration of display quality. Further, when different moving image data are prepared according to the display content of the text image display added to the moving image display, the data capacity of the moving image data tends to increase, and the processing load of the image data also increases. It will be easier. When a special compression coding process or decompression decoding process is executed in order to prevent deterioration of the display quality in the text image display, the processing load of the image data may further increase.

In the feature units 91AK and 92AK, when the effect of moving image display using the moving image data read from the storage area 91AKM11 is executed, the effect of displaying the text image using the text image data read from the storage area 91AKM13 is added. By doing so, it becomes possible to easily display various text images and execute them with high quality, and it becomes easy for the player to recognize the contents of the production. In addition, since the effect of displaying the text image using the text image data stored separately from the moving image data is added, the data capacity of the moving image data is increased and the processing load of the image data is increased. , Appropriate display control that can be prevented as much as possible becomes possible.

The text image display added to the moving image display using the moving image data is controlled by using the text display process table. Similarly, the moving image display is controlled using the moving image display process table, the character image display is controlled using the character display process table, and the audio output is controlled using the audio output process data. In the text display process table, text image designation information and text display setting information are set in association with each other in a plurality of text display periods. The text image designation information specifies the display content of the text image according to the text image data as the first component related to the text image. The text display setting information sets the display mode of the text image, such as the display style and display layout of the text image, as the second component related to the text image. In the VDP91AK132 of the effect control microprocessor 91AK100, for example, the text image renderer 91AK146 displays the text image specified by the text image designation information in a display mode including the display style and display layout set by the text display setting information. It is possible to execute image conversion processing for this purpose. As a result, in the display period of the text image added to the moving image of 1, the display content of the text image as the first component and the display mode of the text image as the second component are changed according to the elapsed time and the like. Make it changeable. By making it possible to change the first component and the second component related to the text image added to the moving image of 1, various text images can be displayed easily and with high quality, and the data capacity and processing load are increased. Appropriate display control is possible so that growth is prevented.

When the reach effect content is "SP reach A (big hit)", one of the text display process tables 91AKT01 and 91AKT02 was used when the effect by moving image display using the moving image data 91AKD01 was executed. It is possible to add a text image and display it. When the reach effect content is "SP reach A (loss)", one of the text display process tables 91AKT01 and 91AKT02 is used when the effect by moving image display using the moving image data 91AKD11 is executed. It is possible to add a text image and display it. Further, when the reach effect content is "SP reach B (big hit)", one of the text display process tables 91AKT11 and 91AKT12 is displayed when the effect by moving image display using the moving image data 91AKD02 is executed. It is possible to add the used text image and display it. When the reach effect content is "SP reach B (loss)", one of the text display process tables 91AKT11 and 91AKT12 is used when the effect by moving image display using the moving image data 91AKD12 is executed. It is possible to add a text image and display it. In this way, it is possible to add and display a text image using data related to a common text image, such as a common text display process table, to a plurality of moving images that are different from each other. By adding a text image using common data to multiple moving images and making it possible to display, various text images can be displayed easily and with high quality, and the increase in data capacity and processing load is prevented. Appropriate display control becomes possible.

In the text display process table 91AKT02, a plurality of text images indicating the line "super hot" are provided by the text image designation information 91AKA13 and the text display setting information 91AKB13 set in association with the text display period from timing T04 to timing T05. The display style and the like may be changed and displayed at the timing of. A text image showing the line "super hot" corresponds to a specific first component group, for example, a text image whose display content suggests that the display result of the variable display has a high ratio of "big hit". It may be a text image. In this way, when displaying the specific text image corresponding to the specific first component group, the second component such as the display mode related to the specific text image may be changed at a plurality of timings.

FIG. 8-8 shows an example of display control when the display style of the text image showing the line "super hot" can be changed at a plurality of timings. In this display control example, in the text display period from timing T04 to timing T05, the display color is black and the character decoration is not set in the text display period from timing T04 to timing T041, and the text from timing T041 to timing T042 is set. In the display period, the display color is gold and the character decoration is not set, and in the text display period from timing T042 to timing T05, the display color is gold and the character decoration is the effect display setting for gold display. As the display style of the text image common to the text display period up to timing T04 and timing T05, the font family is classified into the Mincho typeface of DD_mincho by the fontFamily field, and the font size is 72px by the fontSize field. It is set.

FIG. 8-8 (A) shows a case where a text image with a line of "super hot" is displayed in the text display period from timing T04 to timing T041. As the display style of the text image in this text display period, the display color of the text image is set to black corresponding to # 000000 by the color field, and the character decoration is set to no setting corresponding to none by the textDecoration field. As a result, the display mode including the display style is controlled so that the display color of the text image showing the line "super hot" is black and the character decoration is not set.

FIG. 8-8 (B) shows a case where a text image with a line of "super hot" is displayed in the text display period from timing T041 to timing T042. As the display style of the text image in this text display period, the display color of the text image is set to gold corresponding to "gold" by the color field, and the character decoration is set to no setting corresponding to none by the textDecoration field. As a result, the display mode including the display style of the text image showing the line "super hot" is controlled so that the display color is gold and the character decoration is not set. When the display color of the text image is set to gold, the glossy text image can be displayed by, for example, the gradation display of the text image. However, if the display of the text image is only glossy, it may be difficult for the player to recognize the golden display.

FIG. 8-8 (C) shows a case where a text image with a line of "super hot" is displayed in the text display period from timing T042 to timing T05. As the display style of the text image in this text display period, the color field sets the display color of the text image to gold corresponding to "gold", and the textDecoration field sets the effect display setting for gold display corresponding to effect_gold. Will be done. As a result, the display mode including the display style of the text image showing the line "super hot" is controlled so that the display color is gold and the character decoration is the effect display setting for gold display. In addition to setting the display color of the text image to gold, if the text decoration of the text image is set to the effect display setting for gold display, in addition to the gradation display of the text image, for example, the border of the outline in the text image It is possible to add an effect image around a text image and display it by displaying colors such as and shadows, boundary display by bevel and embossing, layer styles that add brilliance, and some or all combinations of these. As a result, in addition to the display of the text image having glossiness, by adding an effect image around the text image and displaying it, it becomes easier for the player to recognize the golden display, and the game for displaying the text image. It is possible to enhance the impression of a person.

In the text display process tables 91AKT01 and 91AKT02, a part of the text image is separated from the other part by the text image designation information 91AKA02 and the text display setting information 91AKB02 set in association with the text display period from the timing T02 to the timing T03. It may be displayed in a different display style. The text image designation information 91AKA02 designates a text image of the line "If this character wins ...". The text display setting information 91AKB02 displays a part of the text image "character" in the text information indicating the line "If this character wins ..." with a display color and background display of the text image different from the other parts. You can set the color and character style.

FIG. 8-9 shows a display example when a part of the text image has a display style different from that of the other parts. In this display example, a part of the text image "Character" is displayed so that the display color is white, the background display color is black, and the character style is italic, and the other part of the text image is displayed in black. Display so that the background display color is white and the character style is normal. In the text display setting information 91AKB02, the display color of the text image corresponds to #FFFFFF by the color field, and the background display color corresponds to black by the backgroundColor field, corresponding to a part of the text image called "character". The fontStyle field sets the italics whose character style corresponds to italic. Further, the text display setting information 91AKB02 corresponds to the other part of the text image, the display color of the text image is black corresponding to # 000000 by the color field, the background display color is white corresponding to #FFFFFF, and the fontStyle field is used. Set the normal font whose character style corresponds to normal. As a result, the player's impression of the display of the text image can be enhanced by displaying a part of the text image in a display style different from that of the other parts.

In the display of a text image constituting a character string in which a plurality of character images are combined, a part to be displayed in a display style different from other parts may be changed according to the progress of the effect by the moving image display. For example, when a musical piece is played or a dialogue is played back along with a moving image display, a part of the text image corresponding to the progress is displayed in a display style different from other parts such as a specific color display or a highlight display. You may let me. The display style may be changed so that a part of the text image is faded in or faded out according to the situation in which the performance of the music or the voice reproduction of the dialogue progresses. A part of the text image to be displayed in a display style different from other parts is changed according to the elapsed time in arbitrary production execution, not limited to the situation where the performance of the music or the voice reproduction of the dialogue progresses with the moving image display. It may be possible. As a result, in the display of the text image, the part to be displayed in a display style different from the other parts is changed according to the progress of the effect, so that the player's impression of the display of the text image can be enhanced.

The present invention is not limited to the above embodiment, and various modifications and applications are possible. For example, the pachinko gaming machine 1 does not have to have all the technical features shown in the above embodiment, and is shown in the above embodiment so as to solve at least one problem in the prior art. It may have a part of the configuration.

As a specific example, in the display period of the text image added to the moving image 1, the display content of the text image as the first component, the display mode of the text image as the second component, the elapsed time, etc. One of the display control that can be changed according to the display and the display control that can be displayed by adding a text image using data related to a common text image to a plurality of moving images is executed. And the other may not be executed. As the first component and the second component related to the text image, any component may be changed with respect to the display content and display mode of the text image, for example. It is possible to change any component related to the display of the text image in place of part or all of the display content and display mode of the text image, or in addition to part or all of the display content and display mode of the text image. You may. For example, the time interval and movement width for updating the display position when moving and displaying a text image, the enlargement and reduction ratios when displaying a text image enlarged or reduced, and these enlargement and reduction ratios according to the elapsed time. Any component that can be set with respect to the display of the text image, such as the time interval for updating the enlargement ratio and the reduction ratio and the amount of change, may be changed.

When displaying a text image corresponding to a common display content, the one that changes the display mode of the text image is the text image set by the text display setting information 91AKB01 shown in FIG. 8-6 (A). It is not limited to those that change the display color, and any display style, display layout, and other display modes may be changed. For example, the text image of the display mode set by the text display setting information 91AKB01 is replaced with the display color of the text image or in addition to the display color of the text image in the corresponding text display period, the origin coordinates, the font family, and the like. Any display mode such as font size, character thickness, background display color, character style, character arrangement, decorative display, and a combination of some or all of these may be changed. The text image of the display mode set by the text display setting information different from the text display setting information 91AKB01 may be capable of changing the display mode different from the text image of the display mode set by the text display setting information 91AKB01. ..

The text image data is not limited to the data stored in the storage area 91AKM13 as data different from the moving image data, and at least a part of the text image data may be included in the moving image data. Text image data for displaying highly designed characters, such as herbs and cursive, is multiplexed or compressed as part of the moving image data, and the video data separated from this moving image data is decompressed. A text image of a specific aspect may be displayed by decoding or the like. In this case, the data relating to the text image of the specific aspect is included in the moving image data and stored in the storage area 91AKM11. As described above, the data related to the text image includes the specific text image-related data included in the moving image data and stored in the storage area 91AKM11 and the normal text image-related data stored in the storage area 91AKM13. You may.

The text display setting information included in the text display process table is composed of field data corresponding to a part of origin, fontFamily, fontSize, fontWeight, color, backgroundColor, fontStyle, textAlign, and textDecoration as data corresponding to multiple fields. It may be configured to include field data different from these. For example, when the storage address, read address, data size, etc. of the text image data in the storage area 91AKM13 are specified by the text image designation information, the text image data stored in the storage area 91AKM13 is read out without using the font data. , The corresponding text image can be displayed. In this case, since the text display setting information does not require field data related to the font setting, it may be configured without including the field data related to the font setting such as fontFamily, fontSize, fontWeight, and fontStyle. On the other hand, in this case, in order to set the display size of the text image, the text display setting information may be configured to include separate field data related to the text display setting, for example, textSize.

As the scalable font data such as the outline font data and the vector font data stored in the storage area 91AKM13, only the data corresponding to the text image used in the display effect in the pachinko game machine 1 may be prepared, for example, general-purpose Japan. Data corresponding to a text image, such as word font data, which is not limited to the text image used in the display effect in the pachinko game machine 1 may be prepared. When only the font data corresponding to the text image used in the display effect is stored in the storage area 91AKM13, it is possible to prevent an increase in the data capacity when the text image used in the display effect is small. When general-purpose font data corresponding to a text image that is not limited to the text image used in the display effect is stored in the storage area 91AKM13, the font data can be easily reused, so that the design of the effect for displaying the text image is made. It is possible to reduce the burden, and it is possible to prevent an increase in the data capacity when a large amount of text images are used in the display effect.

As the second component of the text image, the specific text image whose display mode including the display style and display layout of the text image can be changed at multiple timings is not limited to the text image showing the line "super hot". , Any text image preset as a specific text image corresponding to the specific first component group may be used. For example, among a plurality of types of text images, a text image prepared in advance for displaying the lyrics of a musical piece or a text image prepared in advance for displaying subtitles of a moving image may be used as a specific text image. In this way, a plurality of second components such as a display mode are provided for a specific text image corresponding to a sound effect or a display effect in which the effect content changes according to the elapsed time, such as a reproduction output of a musical piece or a reproduction display of a moving image. It may be possible to change at the timing. Alternatively, a text image for which a specific display mode is set, such as a text image for rainbow display in which the display color of the text image is rainbow, or a text image for motif display in which the pattern or character decoration of the text image is a cherry blossom pattern. May be used as a specific text image. Alternatively, the text image of the display content suggesting that the display result of the variable display is not limited to the text image of the display content suggesting that the ratio of "big hit" is high, and suggesting that the ratio of being controlled to an arbitrary advantageous state is high. May be used as a specific text image. The advantageous state is not limited to the big hit game state, and may include a special game state such as a time saving state or a probability change state. In addition, the maximum number of round games that can be executed in the jackpot game state is the number of first rounds (for example, "15") that is larger than the number of second rounds (for example, "7"), and it can be executed in a time-saving state. The upper limit of the variable display is the first number (for example, "100"), which is larger than the second number (for example, "50"), and the jackpot probability in the probability variation state is higher than the second probability (for example, 1/50). The number of consecutive chans, which is one probability (for example, 1/20) and the number of times that the jackpot game state is repeatedly controlled without being controlled in the normal state, is larger than the number of consecutive chans (for example, "5"). It may include a more favorable gaming situation for the player, such as part or all of the number of consecutive chans (eg, "10").

The glossy text image is not limited to the case where the display color of the text image is set to gold corresponding to "gold", for example, silver, copper, other metallic colors, or any color different from metallic colors. It may include the case where the display color of is set. The display color of the text image is not limited, and when displaying a preset specific text image, the specific text image may be displayed in a glossy display mode. When displaying an arbitrary text image with glossiness, the textDecoration field in the text display setting information should be set so that an effect image can be added around the text image and displayed. Just do it.

When the text image is displayed in rainbow, a plurality of display colors may be sequentially changed and displayed within a predetermined range such as the coordinates in characters and the display time in the display of the text image. For example, if the display color of the text image is set to the rainbow color corresponding to "rainbow" by the color field in the text display setting information, a different display color can be changed for each in-character coordinate of the text image. , It would be good if rainbow display became possible. For example, in the in-character coordinates of 1, the display color is changed from red to orange, then green, then light blue, then blue, and then blue-purple to magenta, depending on the elapsed time. In addition, a plurality of display colors may be changed in sequence. At this time, in consideration of the fact that red is a color that gives a strong impression to the human eye and that the change in blue becomes dark, the brightness corresponding to each display color in the rainbow display is adjusted for each. The display colors in the in-character coordinates may be changed in the order of red, orange, yellow, green, water, blue, bluish purple, and magenta. After reddish purple, it is sufficient to return to red and change the display color. As a result, the player can smoothly and clearly recognize the change in the display color. In this way, when a special element is set as a character image component, such as when the display color of the text image is set to the rainbow color corresponding to "rainbow" by the color field in the text display setting information, the text display process Even if it is possible to display a text image in which multiple display colors are sequentially changed within the range of the in-character coordinates and display time of the text image specified by the text image specification information corresponding to the text display period included in the table. Good. As a result, it is possible to appropriately control the display so as to enhance the impression of the player on the display of the text image and improve the interest of the effect by the text image display. The display of the text image may be displayed as a rainbow as a whole by sequentially changing different display colors according to the coordinates within the characters of the text image. Alternatively, the display of the text image may be changed to a rainbow display according to the elapsed time by sequentially changing the common display color for all the in-character coordinates. In this way, a text image in which a plurality of display colors are sequentially changed may be displayed within a predetermined range of either the in-character coordinates or the display time.

The first component and the second component related to the text image may be changed to different components depending on whether or not a specific motion of the player is detected, or a plurality of components may be changed at different ratios. It may be changed to either. The player's specific operation that makes it possible to change the first component and the second component related to the text image is, for example, a push operation or a pull operation on the operation stick of the stick controller 31A which is a V controller, and other operation rods of the stick controller 31A. It may be an arbitrary operation of tilting the push button 31b, or an operation of pressing the push button 31b. The movement of the player is not limited to what can be detected, and is based on the detection result of any change or difference in the detection target, for example, the execution state of processing or control in the detection target, the shape, pattern, or color change of the detection target. Therefore, the first component and the second component related to the text image may be changed. A detection device capable of detecting an operation, change, difference, etc. in a detection target can mechanically, electrically, or electromagnetically change the state of the detection target, such as an infrared sensor, an ultrasonic sensor, a CCD sensor, or a CMOS sensor. Any configuration that can be detected may be used. Alternatively, the state of the detection target may be detected by analyzing the result of photographing the detection target using a predetermined camera (video type motion capture). As an example of detecting the state of the detection target using a camera, the screen display state of the mobile terminal may be detected, and the display content and display mode of the text image may be changed based on the detection result.

In the effect of displaying a text image using text image data, a part or all of the effect may be executed as a setting suggestion effect that can suggest a setting value in the pachinko gaming machine 1. For example, when the reach effect content is "SP reach A (big hit)", the text display process tables 91AKT01 and 91AKT02 may be determined at different ratios depending on the set value in the pachinko gaming machine 1. In such a case, the determination ratio of the text display process table 91AKT01 is 35/100 (= 35%) if the set value is 1, and 30/100 (= 30%) if the set value is 2. Yes, if the set value is 3, it is 25/100 (= 25%), if the set value is 4, it is 20/100 (= 20%), and if the set value is 5, it is 15/100 (=). 15%), and if the set value is 6, it may be set to be 10/100 (= 10%). Correspondingly, the determination ratio of the text display process table 91AKT02 is 65/100 (= 65%) when the set value is 1, and 70/100 (= 70%) when the set value is 2. Yes, if the set value is 3, it is 75/100 (= 75%), if the set value is 4, it is 80/100 (= 80%), and if the set value is 5, it is 85/100 (=). 85%), and if the set value is 6, it may be set to 90/100 (= 90%). According to the setting of such a determination ratio, when the reach effect content is "SP reach A (big hit)", the effect of displaying the text image according to any of the text display process patterns 91AKT01 and 91AKT02 is executed. Is different depending on the set value in the pachinko gaming machine 1. For example, when the set value in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is 1, it is easy to execute the effect of displaying the text image according to the text display process table 91AKT01, and as the set value increases, the text corresponding to the text display process table 91AKT02 The ratio of image display effects is increased. Therefore, when the reach effect content is "SP reach A (big hit)" and the effect by displaying the text image according to the text display process table 91AKT02 is executed, the set value in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is advantageous for the player. Expectation is high, which is a setting value.

In addition, it may be possible to execute an arbitrary setting suggestion effect at different ratios according to the set value in the pachinko gaming machine 1. For example, in the case of a specific setting value, the setting suggestion effect may be executed at a higher rate than in the case of a setting value other than the specific setting value. In this case, in the range where the set value is other than the specific set value, there is a limit as a limit that the execution rate of the setting suggestion effect is lower than the range where the set value is the specific set value. If it is a specific set value, it can be executed at a predetermined ratio, and if it is a set value other than the specific set value, a setting suggestion effect that is not executed may be provided. As described above, in the range where the set value is the specific set value, the setting suggestion effect can be executed at a predetermined ratio. On the other hand, in the range where the set value is other than the specific set value, there is a limit as a limit that the setting suggestion effect is not executed.

It may be possible to execute an arbitrary setting suggestion effect at different ratios depending on whether or not it is a special period. For example, in the case of a special period, the setting suggestion effect may be executed at a higher rate than in the case of a period other than the special period. In this case, in the range other than the special period, there is a limit as a limit that the execution rate of the setting suggestion effect is lower than in the range of the special period. If it is a special period, it can be executed at a predetermined ratio, and if it is a period other than the special period, a setting suggestion effect that is not executed may be provided. In this way, within the range of the special period, the setting suggestion effect can be executed at a predetermined ratio. On the other hand, in the range other than the special period, there is a limit as a limit that the setting suggestion effect is not executed.

It is not limited to whether or not it is a special period, and it may be possible to execute an arbitrary setting suggestion effect at a different ratio depending on whether or not an arbitrary special condition is satisfied. For example, when the special condition is satisfied, the setting suggestion effect may be executed at a higher rate than when the special condition is not satisfied. In this case, in the range where the special condition is not satisfied, there is a limit as a limit that the execution rate of the setting suggestion effect is lower than the range where the special condition is satisfied. If the special condition is satisfied, it can be executed at a predetermined ratio, and if the special condition is not satisfied, the setting suggestion effect may be provided. In this way, within the range where the special conditions are satisfied, the setting suggestion effect can be executed at a predetermined ratio. On the other hand, in the range where the special condition is not satisfied, there is a limit as a limit that the setting suggestion effect is not executed. The special condition may be any condition that can be satisfied according to the progress or history of the game in the pachinko game machine 1 or the result of the determination or determination of the game, or the progress or history or the effect of the effect in the pachinko game machine 1. It may be an arbitrary condition that can be satisfied according to the judgment or determination of. The effect is not limited to the setting suggestion effect, and any effect may be executed at a different ratio depending on whether or not a preset condition is satisfied, and whether such a condition is satisfied. The production mode may be determined at a different rate depending on whether or not such a condition is satisfied, or the execution timing may be determined at a different rate depending on whether or not such a condition is satisfied. .. Further, the arbitrary effect may be limited as a limit that a specific effect is not executed in the range where the preset restriction condition is satisfied, or compared with the range where the restriction condition is not satisfied. There may be a limit as a limit that the execution rate is lowered and it is difficult to be executed.

(Problem-solving means and effects of feature 91AK)
A game machine capable of executing a game, for example, a pachinko game machine 1, capable of executing a specific effect of displaying a moving image to which a character image such as a reach effect of SP reach A or SP reach B is added. For example, an effect execution means such as the effect control microprocessor 91AK100, a first storage area for storing data related to a moving image such as a storage area 91AKM11, and a second storage area for storing data related to a character image such as a storage area 91AKM13. And, the display of the moving image is controlled by using the storage data of the first storage area, for example, the moving image control means such as the video decoder 91AK143 and the moving image renderer 91AK144, and the storage data of the second storage area of the character image. A character image control means such as a video decoder 91AK143 and a text image renderer 91AK146 is provided to control the display, and the stored data in the second storage area is a first component such as a text image designated by the text image designation information. The character image control means includes data related to a plurality of character image components including, for example, a second component such as a display style set by text display setting information, and the character image control means is a character image added to one moving image. During the display period, the first component and the second component can be changed, for example, as shown in FIG. 8-7. As a result, various character image displays can be easily and with high quality, and appropriate display control can be performed so as to prevent an increase in data capacity and processing load.

As shown in FIG. 8-8, for example, the character image control means can change the second component related to the character image when displaying the character image corresponding to the common first component during the display period. May be good. As a result, it is possible to appropriately control the display so that various character image displays are executed.

The character image control means uses information common to a specific image different from the character image, such as field data constituting the color field, to change the second component related to the character image, for example, as shown in FIG. 8-6. It may be possible. This makes it possible to control the display appropriately so as to reduce the processing load.

The character image control means can display a specific character image corresponding to a specific first component group, for example, a text image indicating "super hot", and is related to the specific character image, for example, as shown in FIG. 8-8. The second component may be changed at a plurality of timings. As a result, it is possible to appropriately control the display so that various character image displays are executed.

As shown in FIG. 8-4, for example, the character image control means may be able to individually change and display the first component and the second component related to the character image. As a result, it is possible to appropriately control the display so that various character image displays are executed.

The storage data in the second storage area may include outline data that can be used for displaying a character image, such as outline font data. As a result, various character image displays can be easily and with high quality, and appropriate display control can be performed so as to prevent an increase in data capacity and processing load.

When a specific element such as when the color field is "gold" is set as the character image component, for example, as shown in FIG. 8-8, a glossy character image is displayed and the character image is displayed. It may be possible to add an effect image to the surroundings and display it. As a result, it is possible to appropriately control the display so as to enhance the impression of the player on the character image display and to improve the interest of the effect by the character image display.

When a special element such as when the color field is "rainbow" is set as the character image component, for example, in a predetermined range such as the in-character coordinates and the display time range, for example, red, orange, yellow, green, It may be possible to display a character image in which a plurality of display colors are sequentially changed, such as changing in the order of water, blue, bluish purple, and reddish purple. As a result, it is possible to appropriately control the display so as to enhance the impression of the player on the character image display and to improve the interest of the effect by the character image display.

(Problem-solving means and effects of feature 92AK)
A game machine capable of executing a game, for example, a pachinko game machine 1, capable of executing a specific effect of displaying a moving image to which a character image such as a reach effect of SP reach A or SP reach B is added. For example, an effect execution means such as the effect control microprocessor 91AK100, a first storage area for storing data related to a moving image such as a storage area 91AKM11, and a second storage area for storing data related to a character image such as a storage area 91AKM13. And, the display of the moving image is controlled by using the storage data of the first storage area, for example, a moving image control means such as a video decoder 91AK143 and a moving image renderer 91AK144, and a character image using the storage data of the second storage area. A character image control means such as a video decoder 91AK143 and a text image renderer 91AK146 is provided to control the display, and the stored data in the second storage area is a first component such as a text image designated by the text image designation information. And, for example, data on a plurality of character image components including a second component such as a display style set by text display setting information is included, and the character image control means is, for example, a moving image using moving image data 91AKD01. For the first moving image and the second moving image such as a moving image using the moving image data 91AKD11, which is different from the first moving image, for example, a text image according to the text display process tables 91AKT01 and 91AKT02, etc. , It is possible to add and display a character image using data related to a common character image. As a result, various character image displays can be easily and with high quality, and appropriate display control can be performed so as to prevent an increase in data capacity and processing load.

As shown in FIG. 8-8, for example, the character image control means displays a character image corresponding to a common first component during the display period of the character image added to the moving image of 1. The second component with respect to may be modifiable. As a result, it is possible to appropriately control the display so that various character image displays are executed.

The character image control means uses information common to a specific image different from the character image, such as field data constituting the color field, to change the second component related to the character image, for example, as shown in FIG. 8-6. It may be possible. This makes it possible to control the display appropriately so as to reduce the processing load.

The character image control means can display a specific character image corresponding to a specific first component group, for example, a text image indicating "super hot", and is related to the specific character image, for example, as shown in FIG. 8-8. The second component may be changed at a plurality of timings. As a result, it is possible to appropriately control the display so that various character image displays are executed.

As shown in FIG. 8-4, for example, the character image control means may be able to individually change and display the first component and the second component related to the character image. As a result, it is possible to appropriately control the display so that various character image displays are executed.

The storage data in the second storage area may include outline data that can be used for displaying a character image, such as outline font data. As a result, various character image displays can be easily and with high quality, and appropriate display control can be performed so as to prevent an increase in data capacity and processing load.

When a specific element such as when the color field is "gold" is set as the character image component, for example, as shown in FIG. 8-8, a glossy character image is displayed and the character image is displayed. It may be possible to add an effect image to the surroundings and display it. As a result, it is possible to appropriately control the display so as to enhance the impression of the player on the character image display and to improve the interest of the effect by the character image display.

When a special element such as when the color field is "rainbow" is set as the character image component, for example, in a predetermined range such as the in-character coordinates and the display time range, for example, red, orange, yellow, green, It may be possible to display a character image in which a plurality of display colors are sequentially changed, such as changing in the order of water, blue, bluish purple, and reddish purple. As a result, it is possible to appropriately control the display so as to enhance the impression of the player on the character image display and to improve the interest of the effect by the character image display.

(Explanation related to association of feature parts)
The configuration relating to the feature portions 91AK and 92AK may be appropriately combined with a part or all of the configuration relating to the feature portion 60AK. For example, the operation effect to be executed after the elapse of a predetermined period can be executed as the setting suggestion effect which is the operation effect of the suggestion effect mode, and the first component is in the display period of the character image added to the moving image of 1. And the second component may be changed, and a character image using data related to a common character image is used for the first moving image and the second moving image different from the first moving image. It may be additionally displayable.

(Explanation of feature parts 01AK and 02AK)
FIG. 9-1 shows a configuration example 01AKP0 of the screen display in the image display device 5 with respect to the feature units 01AK and 02AK. In the configuration example 01AKP0, an active display area 01AKA1, a first hold display area 01AKB1, a second hold display area 01AKB2, and a small symbol display area 01AKC1 are provided on the screen of the image display device 5.

In the active display area 01AKA1, active display is performed by displaying an effect image corresponding to the variable display during execution. In the first hold display area 01AKB1, hold display is performed by displaying an effect image corresponding to the variable display in which execution is held, according to the number of first hold storages. In the second hold display area 01AKB2, hold display is performed by displaying an effect image corresponding to the variable display in which execution is held, according to the number of second hold storages. As described above, in the active display area 01AKA1, the first hold display area 01AKAB1, and the second hold display area 01AKAB2, active display and hold display which are specific displays based on the information related to the variable display are possible. The hold display in the first hold display area 01AKB1 is also referred to as a "first hold display", and the hold display in the second hold display area 01AKB2 is also referred to as a "second hold display".

In the first hold display area 01AKB1, for example, hold display associated with hold numbers "1", "2", "3", and "4" can be performed in order from the right end, and the first hold display is right-justified. It suffices if the display area is configured to be done. In the second hold display area 01AKB2, for example, hold display associated with hold numbers "1", "2", "3", and "4" can be performed in order from the left end, and the second hold display is left-justified. It suffices if the display area is configured to be done. In the active display area 01AKA1, the active display corresponding to the first hold display erased (digested) in the first hold display area 01AKAB1 is started in response to the start of the first special figure game, and the second special figure game Corresponding to the start, the active display corresponding to the second hold display deleted (digested) in the second hold display area 01AKB2 is started. The active display that can be displayed in the active display area 01AKA1 may be any one that has the same color and pattern as the first hold display and the second hold display. For example, the active display is the same as the first hold display and the second hold display. The effect image of may be displayed larger than each hold display. The display mode of the active display may change to a display mode different from that of the first hold display or the second hold display by executing the active display change effect. Further, in the active display area 01AKA1, for example, by displaying an effect image showing the pedestal below the active display, the active display may be recognized separately from the first hold display and the second hold display.

A small symbol display area 01AKC1 is arranged at a predetermined position on the screen of the image display device 5. The small symbol display area 01AKC1 is smaller than the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R of "left", "middle", and "right", and is provided at a predetermined position such as the right end portion on the screen of the image display device 5. ing. In the small symbol display area 01AKC1, variable display of small symbols is executed in response to variable display of special symbols and decorative symbols. The effect image showing the small pattern is smaller than the identification information image which is the effect image showing the decorative pattern, and the variable display can be executed in a manner in which a part or all of the identification information image showing the decorative pattern is common. It may be a reduced identification information image. For example, when the identification information image showing the decorative symbol includes a part showing a number and a part showing a character, the effect image showing the small symbol corresponds to the same symbol number as the part showing the number included in the decorative symbol. Since it is an image showing the numbers and does not include a part showing a character, it suffices if a small symbol can be displayed in a simpler manner than an effect image showing a decorative symbol. In the small symbol display area 01AKC1, by displaying the small symbols in a simple manner, it is sufficient to prevent the display contents and display results of the small symbols from being misidentified by the player. In the small symbol display area 01AKC1 provided on the screen of the image display device 5, the small symbol as the reduced identification information is variably displayed, and the confirmed small symbol as the display result is derived. The effect image showing the small pattern may be displayed at a position where it can be visually recognized at all times.

FIG. 9-2 shows a configuration example of a drawing command for an effect. In this embodiment, commands 01AKG01 to 01AKG06 are prepared in advance as drawing commands for a plurality of effects. The command 01AKG01 is a drawing command in which color blending for blurring by bilinear sampling is instructed. The command 01AKG02 is a drawing command in which a color blend that inverts the color information is instructed. The command 01AKG03 is a drawing command in which a color blend for blurring by changing the magnification is instructed. The command 01AKG04 is a drawing command in which a color blend for monochrome conversion is instructed. The command 01AKG05 is a drawing command in which a color blend for blurring by rotation is instructed. The command 01AKG06 is a drawing command instructed to change the offset amount of the image position.

The drawing command for the effect may be prepared as a drawing command of 1, or may be prepared as a display list. The display list is a command group for performing drawing control, and can be created by the CPU 91AK 131 as a command sequence in which a plurality of commands for the VDP 91AK 132 are combined. In VDP91AK132, the drawing process can be executed in the order described in the display list. The drawing command for an effect may be composed of a combination of commands for setting a plurality of types of inter-pixel calculation. For example, in a drawing command in which color blending is instructed, it may be possible to function as a drawing command for each effect by setting parameters according to the effect to be applied. For example, in the internal register of VDP91AK132, control data for specifying the calculation target included in the display list, numerical data for specifying parameters, and other register values are stored, and register values corresponding to execution commands are stored. Drawing according to the display list starts.

When color blending for blurring by bilinear sampling is executed in response to command 01AKG01, a reduced image is generated by, for example, texture mapping of a bilinear interpolation method for image data. When generating this reduced image, a plurality of reduced images with different sampling point groups may be generated. Using the plurality of reduced images generated in this way, a composite reduced image is generated by executing a compositing process by color blending, for example, alpha blending. After that, by executing the enlargement processing of the combined reduced image, it is possible to draw the generated image by changing the color information included in the image data so as to obtain the blurred image.

When executing a color blend that inverts the color information in response to the command 01AKG02, for example, the RGB value, which is the color information of each pixel (1 pixel) shown in the image data, is set to the maximum value (for example, 255). Executes the difference calculation process of. For example, when the R value corresponding to "red" is "80", the color information can be inverted by obtaining 255-80 = 175. For the G value corresponding to "green" and the B value corresponding to "blue", the color information included in the image data is included in the image data so that the image becomes an inverted image by executing the same difference calculation process. Can be changed to draw the generated image.

When executing a color blend for blurring by changing the magnification in response to the command 01AKG03, for example, a plurality of enlarged images or reduced images are generated by scaling processing on the image data. At this time, a plurality of enlarged images or reduced images having different magnifications such as an enlargement ratio and a reduction ratio of the image are generated. For example, for an image having a display magnification of 100%, two types of enlarged images such as an image having a display magnification of 102% and an image having a display magnification of 104% are generated. Blur processing is performed by performing a composition process by color blending, for example, alpha blending, using the plurality of enlarged or reduced images generated in this way and the image (original image) corresponding to the original image data. It is possible to draw the generated image by changing the color information included in the image data so as to obtain the resulting image.

When executing a color blend for monochrome conversion in response to the command 01AKG04, for example, the monochrome conversion calculation process is executed for each pixel for the RGB value which is the color information of each pixel (1 pixel) indicated by the image data. To do. In the monochrome conversion calculation process, the color information can be changed so that the image becomes monochrome by substituting the RGB value into the calculation formula for color tone conversion. By executing the monochrome conversion calculation process in this way, it is possible to draw the generated image by changing the color information included in the image data so that the image is monochrome-converted.

When executing color blending for blurring by rotation in response to command 01AKG05, for example, a plurality of rotated images are generated by rotation calculation processing on image data. At this time, a plurality of rotated images having different rotation angles of the images are generated. For example, for an image having a rotation angle of 0 °, two types of rotation images such as an image having a rotation angle of 2 ° and an image having a rotation angle of 4 ° are generated. An image that has been blurred by performing a color blending composition process such as alpha blending using the plurality of rotated images generated in this way and the image (original image) corresponding to the original image data. It is possible to draw the generated image by changing the color information included in the image data so as to be.

When changing the offset amount of the image position corresponding to the command 01AKG06, the position information of the image is changed by, for example, the coordinate value conversion process for the image data. In the coordinate value conversion process, the position information when drawing an image, such as a UV coordinate value, is changed according to the offset amount set as a parameter. The UV coordinate value is given as a texture coordinate attribute value when mapping a texture to an object. By executing the coordinate value conversion process, it is possible to draw the generated image by changing the position information corresponding to the image data so that the image has a different texture arrangement.

As described above, the effect drawing command may include a command such as commands 01AKG01 to 01AKG05 that can draw the generated image by changing the color information included in the image data. Further, the effect drawing command may include a command such as command 01AKG06 that changes the position information corresponding to the image data to enable drawing of the generated image. In addition, the drawing command for the effect may include a command that makes it possible to draw the generated image by changing arbitrary attribute information related to the image data.

Unlike these effect drawing commands, the CPU 91AK131 can also generate normal display drawing commands. The normal display drawing command executes a process of drawing an image corresponding to the image data without changing the color information included in the image data by not executing the composition process by color blending.

FIG. 9-3 shows a configuration example of a screen display including various effect images that can be displayed on the screen of the image display device 5. The plurality of effect images displayed on the image display device 5 are divided into a plurality of display layers and drawn. Different display priorities are set in advance for the plurality of display layers as display layers for the effect image. In the configuration example shown in FIG. 9-3, layers 01AKL1 to 01AKL5 are provided as a plurality of display layers. Of these, layer 01AKL1 is a display layer having the highest display priority, and an effect image or the like showing a small symbol in the small symbol display area 01AKC1 is drawn so as to be displayable. The layer 01AKL2 is a display layer having the next highest display priority after the layer 01AKL1, and draws an effect image corresponding to the hold display or the active display so as to be displayable. Further, the layer 01AKL2 may draw an effect image showing the pedestal below the active display so as to be displayable. The layer 01AKL3 is a display layer having a display priority next to that of the layer 01AKL2, and draws an effect image or the like used for a chance-up effect during reach so that it can be displayed. Layer 01AKL4 is a display layer having the next highest display priority after layer 01AKL3, and displays effect images showing decorative symbols in the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R of "left", "middle", and "right". Draw as much as possible. The layer 01AKL5 is a display layer having the lowest display priority, and draws an effect image or the like as a background image so that it can be displayed.

The display layer on which a plurality of effect images are arranged is specified by, for example, display priority information included in the display list. In the display list, the effect image arranged on the layer 01AKL5 is designated as the first drawing target, and then the effect image arranged on each display layer is specified as the drawing target in the order of layers 01AKL4, 01AKL3, 01AKL2, 01AKL1. May be good. Further, for example, in the image data of the effect images drawn on each layer 01AKL1 to 01AKL5, a Z value which is a depth value used when each effect image is superimposed and drawn may be set. By setting the Z value in the Z value setting table, the Z value of the effect image drawn on each layer 01AKL1 to 01AKL5 may be a different value depending on the drawing destination layer. For example, a display layer to which a small value is assigned as a Z value is arranged on the front side (front side) in the Z-axis direction as compared with a display layer to which a large value is assigned as a Z value, and the display priority of an image is high. You can do it like this.

The VDP91AK132 may determine the display priority by performing a Z value comparison operation when writing the image data read from the effect data memory 91AK123 or the like to the frame buffer provided in the VRAM91AK147 or the like. At this time, for example, the image data of the effect image having a small Z value is written to the frame buffer with priority over the image data of the effect image having a large Z value. As a result, the effect image drawn on the display layer to which a small value as the Z value is assigned has a higher display priority than the effect image drawn on the display layer to which the large value as the Z value is assigned, and is seen by the player. It can be placed on the front side (front side). On the other hand, the effect image drawn on the display layer to which a large value as the Z value is assigned has a lower display priority than the effect image drawn on the display layer to which the small value as the Z value is assigned. It can be placed on the back side (rear side). The relationship between the Z value and the display priority may be the opposite, and the display layer to which a large value is assigned as the Z value is Z more than the display layer to which the small value is assigned as the Z value. It may be arranged on the front side (front side) in the axial direction so that the display priority of the image is high.

In this way, the drawing process of the effect image according to the display layer is executed, and the display image 01AKD1 including the plurality of effect images is generated. The display image 01AKD1 is displayed on the screen of the image display device 5 after the images drawn on the layers 01AKL1 to 01AKL5 are superposed and combined as a plurality of display layers having different display priorities.

Of the layers 01AKL1 to 01AKL5, the layers 01AKL1 and 01AKL2 are special layers, and the layers 01AKL3 to 01AKL5 are specific layers. In the layers 01AKL3 to 01AKL5 included in the specific layer, the effect image can be drawn and displayed by a drawing process different from the effect images drawn on the layers 01AKL1 and 01AKL2 included in the special layer.

FIG. 9-4 is a flowchart showing an example of the effect drawing composition processing executed by the VDP91AK132. The effect drawing composition process is executed when, for example, the display list including the effect drawing command is transferred based on the decoding result of the instruction code by the instruction decoder 91AK141 of VDP91AK132. When the effect drawing / compositing process is started, the image data to be processed for the effect is read out (step 01AKS01). For example, in the VDP 91AK 132, the image data to be processed is read from the effect data memory 91AK123 or the like, stored in the work area of the VRAM 91AK147 or the like, and temporarily stored. The data transfer circuit of VDP91AK132 reads the image data to be processed from the buffer area of the effect data memory 91AK123 or VRAM91AK147 by accessing the image data address specified by the drawing command, and transfers the image data to the work area of VRAM91AK147. And memorize it. As the image data to be processed by the effect, image data indicating an image to be drawn on any of layers 01AKL3 to 01AKL5, which are specific layers, is specified by a drawing command among a plurality of display layers.

After that, the effect color blend is executed according to the drawing command (step 01AKS02). For example, the VDP 91AK 132 may execute, for example, any of the commands 01AKG01 to 01AKG05 by executing the inter-pixel arithmetic processing specified by the drawing command by a part or all of the moving image renderer 91AK144, the character image renderer 91AK145, and the text image renderer 91AK146. The color blend according to the above may be executed. In the case of the command 01AKG06, the coordinate value conversion process for changing the offset amount of the image position in the texture mapping may be executed.

After step 01AKS02, images are combined and drawn corresponding to the low priority display layer (step 01AKS03). At this time, the image obtained by performing the effect color blending in step 01AKS02 is drawn in the frame buffer for screen display of the VRAM 91AK147. For example, the VDP91AK132 is drawn on the layers 01AKL3 to 01AKL5 by executing the inter-pixel arithmetic processing specified by the drawing command by a part or all of the moving image renderer 91AK144, the character image renderer 91AK145, and the text image renderer 91AK146. The images may be stored in the frame buffer for screen display while being combined according to the display priority. As a result, the image drawn on any of layers 01AKL3 to 01AKL5, which is a specific layer, can be drawn for screen display after changing the color information of the image data by executing the effect color blend. it can.

After step 01AKS03, images are combined and drawn corresponding to the high priority display layer (step 01AKS04). For example, in the VDP 91AK 132, the image data to be drawn is read from the effect data memory 91AK123 or the like and drawn in the frame buffer for screen display of the VRAM 91AK147. An image in the low priority display layer has already been drawn in this frame buffer by step 01AKS03. The data transfer circuit of the VDP91AK132 reads the image data to be drawn from the effect data memory 91AK123, the buffer area of the VRAM91AK147, etc. by accessing the address of the image data specified by the drawing command, and uses the VRAM91AK147 for screen display. It may be transferred to the frame buffer and stored. At this time, the moving image renderer 91AK144, the character image renderer 91AK145, and the text image renderer 91AK146 are drawn on the layers 01AKL1 and 01AKL2 by executing the inter-pixel arithmetic processing specified by the drawing command, respectively. The images may be stored in the frame buffer for screen display while being combined according to the display priority. As the image data to be drawn in step 01AKS04, image data indicating an image to be drawn on any of layers 01AKL1 and 01AKL2, which are special layers, is specified by a drawing command by a drawing command. As a result, the image drawn on either of the special layers 01AKL1 and 01AKL2 can be drawn for screen display without executing the effect color blend and without changing the color information of the image data. Can be done.

As described above, the VDP 91AK 132 can execute the drawing process for displaying various images on the screen of the image display device 5 by using the image data stored in the predetermined area of the effect data memory 91AK123 or the VRAM 91AK147. Further, by executing the effect drawing composition process, on the other hand, the color information included in the image data can be changed and drawn with respect to the image drawn on any of the layers 01AKL3 to 01AKL5 which is a specific layer. On the other hand, with respect to the image drawn on any of the layers 01AKL1 and 01AKL2 which are special layers, the image can be drawn corresponding to the image data.

When the display list including the normal display drawing command is transferred without including the effect drawing command, the VDP91AK132 can execute the normal drawing composition process different from the effect drawing composition process. In the normal drawing composition process, the data transfer circuit of the VDP91AK132 reads the image data to be drawn from the effect data memory 91AK123, the buffer area of the VRAM91AK147, etc. by accessing the address of the image data specified by the drawing command, and causes the VRAM91AK147 to read the image data. It may be transferred to a frame buffer for screen display and stored. At this time, the moving image renderer 91AK144, the character image renderer 91AK145, and the text image renderer 91AK146 are drawn on the layers 01AKL1 and 01AKL2 by executing the inter-pixel arithmetic processing specified by the drawing command, respectively. The images may be stored in the frame buffer for screen display while being combined according to the display priority. In this case, the color information of the image data and the like of the image drawn on any of the special layers 01AKL1 and 01AKL2 and the specific layers 01AKL3 to 01AKL5 are changed without executing the effect color blend. It can be drawn for screen display without.

FIG. 9-5 shows an execution example of image processing by the effect drawing composition processing. In this case, in the display list including the drawing command for the effect, as the image data to be processed by the effect, the image data 01AKD03 and the layer of the effect image arranged on the layer 01AKL3 among the layers 01AKL3 to 01AKL5 included in the specific layer. The image data 01AKD04 of the effect image arranged on the 01AKL4 and the image data 01AKD05 of the effect image arranged on the layer 01AKL5 are designated, respectively. When the VDP91AK132 reads out these image data in step 91AKS01 of the effect drawing / compositing process, the VDP91AK132 stores them in the subframe buffer 01AKF01 provided in the work area of the VRAM91AK147 or the like and temporarily stores them. As a result, as shown in FIG. 9-5 (A1), the image data 01AKD03 of the effect image arranged on the layer 01AKL3, the image data 01AKD04 of the effect image arranged on the layer 01AKL4, and the effect arranged on the layer 01AKL5. The image data 01AKD05 of the image is stored in the subframe buffer 01AKF01.

Subsequently, the VDP91AK132 executes the effect color blending on the image data stored in the subframe buffer 01AKF01 in step 91AKS02 of the effect drawing composition processing. For example, when a color blend to be converted to monochrome is specified by the command 01AKG04 as a drawing command for an effect, the color information included in the image data is changed by executing the monochrome conversion calculation process. As a result, the color information of the image data 01AKD03 of the effect image arranged on the layer 01AKL3 is changed so as to be the monochrome-converted image data 01AKD13 as shown in FIG. 9-5 (A2). The color information of the image data 01AKD04 of the effect image arranged on the layer 01AKL4 is changed so as to be the monochrome-converted image data 01AKD14 as shown in FIG. 9-5 (A2). The color information of the image data 01AKD05 of the effect image arranged on the layer 01AKL5 is changed so as to be the monochrome-converted image data 01AKD15 as shown in FIG. 9-5 (A2).

After that, the VDP91AK132 synthesizes an image corresponding to the low priority display layer by the effect drawing composition processing step 91AKS03. For example, the image data read from the subframe buffer 01AKF01 is written to the mainframe buffer 01AKF02 and stored in order from the display layer having the lowest display priority. At this time, the image data may be overwritten or the hidden surface may be erased according to the display priority. Of the image data 01AKD13 to 01AKD15 stored in the subframe buffer 01AKF01 shown in FIG. 9-5 (A2), the image data 01AKD15 of the effect image arranged on the layer 01AKL5 is read first and written to the main frame buffer 01AKF02. Remember with. The image data 01AKD14 of the effect image arranged on the layer 01AKL4 is read out second, superimposed on the image data 01AKD15 stored in the mainframe buffer 01AKF02, and written and synthesized. The image data 01AKD13 of the effect image arranged on the layer 01AKL3 is read out third, superimposed on the image data 01AKD14 and 01AKD15 stored in the mainframe buffer 01AKF02, and written and synthesized.

Then, the VDP91AKD132 synthesizes an image corresponding to the display layer having a high priority by the effect drawing composition processing step 91AKS04. At this time, for example, by a drawing command included in the display list, the image data 01AKD02 of the effect image arranged on the layer 01AKL2 is first designated as the image data to be drawn among the layers 01AKL1 and 01AKL2 included in the special layer. , The image data 01AKD01 of the effect image arranged on the layer 01AKL1 is designated next. Each time the VDP91AK132 reads out these image data, the VDP91AK132 writes and stores the image data in the mainframe buffer 01AKF02. That is, among the image data 01AKD01 and 01AKD02 to be drawn, the image data 01AKD02 of the effect image arranged on the layer 01AKL2 is read first and superimposed on the image data 01AKD13 to 01AKD15 stored in the mainframe buffer 01AKF02. Write and synthesize. The image data 01AKD01 of the effect image arranged on the layer 01AKL1 is finally read out, superimposed on the image data 01AKD02 and 01AKD13 to 01AKD15 stored in the mainframe buffer 01AKF02, and written and synthesized.

In this way, the image data 01AKD03 to 01AKD05 temporarily stored in the subframe buffer 01AKF01 is converted into image data 01AKD13 to 01AKD15 whose color information is changed by the effect color blend, and the converted image data 01AKD13 to 01AKD15 has priority for display. The data is written to the main frame buffer 01AKF02 in the order according to the degree. After that, the image data 01AKD01 and 01AKD02 are written to the mainframe buffer 01AKF02 in the order according to the display priority without changing the color information by not executing the effect color blend. Therefore, in 01AKL3 to 01AKL5, which are specific layers, various production images such as a background image, a production image showing a decorative pattern, and a production image for increasing the chance during reach are displayed by drawing by a specific drawing process such as an effect color blend. It is possible. On the other hand, in 01AKL1 and 01AKL2, which are special layers, drawing is performed by a normal drawing process that does not perform color blending for effects, and the effect image showing a hold display or active display, an effect image showing a small pattern, etc. It is possible to display a related predetermined image.

FIG. 9-6 shows an image display example by executing the effect drawing composition processing. When the display list including the effect drawing command is transferred, the VDP91AK132 can display the effect image drawn by changing the color information included in the image data by executing the effect drawing composition process. ..

FIG. 9-6 (A) shows an image display example 01AKM01 in the case of monochrome conversion. When the display list including the command 01AKG04 is transferred as the effect drawing command, the effect image drawn by the monochrome conversion calculation process among the effect color blends is displayed on the layers 01AKL3 to 01AKL5 which are the specific layers. It is possible. The monochrome conversion calculation process is a process for drawing with a smaller number of colors than the color information included in the image data. As a result, in the layers 01AKL3 to 01AKL5, which are the specific layers of the image display example 01AKM01, the layers 01AKL3 to 01AKL5 are drawn by a monochrome conversion calculation process for drawing with a smaller number of colors than the color information included in the image data as the specific drawing process. It is possible to display a production image. In the layers 01AKL1 and 01AKL2, which are special layers of the image display example 01AKM01, it is possible to display a predetermined image relating to the progress of the game by drawing without changing the color information included in the image data by the normal drawing process.

FIG. 9-6 (B) shows an image display example 01AKM02 in the case of color information inversion. When the display list including the command 01AKG02 is transferred as the effect drawing command, the effect image drawn by the difference calculation process among the effect color blends can be displayed on the layers 01AKL3 to 01AKL5 which are the specific layers. Is. The difference calculation process is a process for converting and drawing a value of color information included in image data so as to be inverted by the difference from the maximum value. As a result, in the layers 01AKL3 to 01AKL5, which are the specific layers of the image display example 01AKM02, as the specific drawing process, the value of the color information included in the image data is converted and drawn by the difference calculation process or the like to draw the image for production. Can be displayed. In the layers 01AKL1 and 01AKL2, which are special layers of the image display example 01AKM02, a predetermined image relating to the progress of the game can be displayed by drawing the image data without converting the value of the color information included in the image data by the normal drawing process.

In addition, when the display list including the command 01AKG01 is transferred as the drawing command for the effect, the layers 01AKL3 to 01AKL5, which are the specific layers, are subjected to the compositing process of performing color blending for blurring by bilinear sampling as the specific drawing process. It is possible to display an effect image drawn by changing the color information included in the image data. In this case, the layers 01AKL1 and 01AKL2, which are special layers, may be drawn without changing the color information and the like included in the image data by the normal drawing process, and may be able to display a predetermined image relating to the progress of the game.

When the display list including the command 01AKG03 is transferred as the drawing command for the effect, the layers 01AKL3 to 01AKL5, which are the specific layers, perform the image data by the compositing process of performing the color blending for blurring by changing the magnification as the specific drawing process. It is possible to display an effect image drawn by changing the color information included in. In this case, the layers 01AKL1 and 01AKL2, which are special layers, may be drawn without changing the color information and the like included in the image data by the normal drawing process, and may be able to display a predetermined image relating to the progress of the game.

When the display list including the command 01AKG05 is transferred as the drawing command for the effect, the layers 01AKL3 to 01AKL5, which are the specific layers, are converted into the image data by the compositing process of performing the color blending for blurring by rotation as the specific drawing process. It is possible to display an effect image drawn by changing the included color information. In this case, the layers 01AKL1 and 01AKL2, which are special layers, may be drawn without changing the color information and the like included in the image data by the normal drawing process, and may be able to display a predetermined image relating to the progress of the game.

When the display list including the command 01AKG06 is transferred as the drawing command for the effect, the layers 01AKL3 to 01AKL5, which are the specific layers, perform the image data by the coordinate value conversion process for changing the offset amount of the image position as the specific drawing process. It is possible to display an effect image drawn by changing the position information corresponding to. In this case, the layers 01AKL1 and 01AKL2, which are special layers, may be drawn by normal drawing processing without changing the position information corresponding to the image data, and may be able to display a predetermined image relating to the progress of the game.

By using these drawing commands for effects, the effect image drawn by changing the color information included in the image data and the effect image drawn by changing the position information corresponding to the image data can be displayed on a specific layer. Can be displayed. As a result, even if the production image is drawn using common image data, different image processing can be executed according to the effect drawing command, so that the color information or the position information is changed and drawn. Therefore, it is possible to improve the enjoyment of the game by executing various display effects while preventing the amount of image data from increasing.

FIG. 9-7 (A) shows an example of setting the jackpot reliability according to the reach effect content. The jackpot reliability for each reach effect is the ratio of the case where the variable display result becomes "big hit" and is controlled to the jackpot game state in the case where each reach effect is executed. In this setting example, the jackpot reliability is set to be different depending on the reach effects of a plurality of types of super reach such as SP reach A1 to A3 or SP reach B. For example, in the variable display pattern determination table, the rate at which the variable display result becomes a "big hit" is set to be different according to a plurality of types of reach effects by assigning a determination value to be compared with a random value for determining the variable display pattern. I just need to be there.

SP reach A1 to A3 are reach productions of super reach with lower jackpot reliability than SP reach B, and are also called "weak SP reach". SP reach B is a reach production of super reach with higher jackpot reliability than SP reach A1 to A3, and is also called "strong SP reach". For example, the jackpot reliability of SP reach A1 is 20%, the jackpot reliability of SP reach A2 is 25%, the jackpot reliability of SP reach A3 is 30%, and the jackpot reliability of SP reach B is 80%. Is. Therefore, when the reach effect of SP reach A1 is executed, the variable display result becomes a "big hit" only about once in five times. On the other hand, when the reach effect of SP reach B is executed, the variable display result becomes a "big hit" about 4 times out of 5 times. In the case of SP reach A1 to A3, the reach effect content may include an effect mode in which a part of the reach can recognize the commonality. For example, in the SP reach A1 to A3, moving images common to each other may be reproduced and displayed as background images. Alternatively, in SP reach A1 to A3, a common character image may be displayed as an animation. The reach effect content may include an effect mode in which the difference between the SP reach B and the SP reach A1 to A3 can be recognized. For example, in SP reach B, a moving image different from SP reach A1 to A3 may be reproduced and displayed as a background image. Alternatively, in SP reach B, a character image different from SP reach A1 to A3 may be displayed as an animation. The reach effect content may include an effect mode in which the difference from the other cases can be recognized in any one of the SP reach A1 to A3. For example, in the SP reach A1 to A3, moving images different from each other may be reproduced and displayed as background images. Alternatively, the SP reach A1 to A3 may animate different character images. In addition, the effect mode in which the difference can be recognized is an arbitrary display on the screen of the image display device 5, an arbitrary sound output from the speakers 8L and 8R, and an arbitrary light emitting member such as a game effect lamp 9 and a decorative LED. It may be the light emission of the above, an arbitrary operation using the movable member for effect, or a combination of a part or all of them.

When a reach effect that becomes a super reach such as SP reach A1 to A3 is executed, a drawing effect by displaying an image drawn in response to an effect drawing command is included. As the drawing effect, one of a plurality of types of display effects capable of displaying an image drawn by different drawing processes according to the effect drawing command may be selected and executed. As a drawing effect, the image drawn according to the effect drawing command is not displayed, but even if it is possible to execute a display effect that can display the image drawn according to a drawing command different from the effect drawing command. Good. When the reach effect that becomes the super reach is executed, even if the effect of displaying the image drawn only in response to the normal display drawing command is executed without executing the specific drawing effect. Good.

FIG. 9-7 (B) shows a setting example of the drawing effect content according to the drawing effect pattern. In this setting example, as a plurality of drawing effect patterns, drawing effect patterns 02AKA01, 02AKA02, 02AKB01, 02AKB02, 02AKB11, 02AKB12 are prepared in advance. A part or all of the drawing effect contents is different depending on the plurality of drawing effect patterns. The contents of the drawing effect include the presence / absence and type of the drawing effect by the effect display and the presence / absence of the drawing effect by the strobe display. A drawing effect that does not include an effect display or strobe display is also called a normal drawing effect. Drawing effects by effect display or strobe display are also called specific drawing effects.

The effect display is an effect display in which the color information included in the image data is changed and drawn when the drawing command for the effect is generated and transferred. The types of effect display include monochrome conversion effect and color information inversion effect. The monochrome conversion effect uses the command 01AKG04 among the drawing commands for the effect to draw and display the effect image subjected to the monochrome conversion. The color information inversion effect uses command 02 among the effect drawing commands to draw and display an effect image in which the color information is inverted. As described above, the effect display may be any effect as long as it can display the effect image drawn by changing the color information included in the image data. As for the effect display, for example, the effect image drawn by changing the position information corresponding to the image data may be displayed by using the command 01AKG06 among the drawing commands for the effect.

The strobe display is an effect display in which an image drawn using image data and a single color (for example, black or white) image set differently from the image data are alternately and repeatedly displayed for each predetermined number of frames. Is. The strobe display may be executed for an image drawn on layers 01AKL3 to 01AKL5, which are specific layers, when a drawing command different from the effect drawing command is generated and transferred. On the other hand, the strobe display may not be executed for the images drawn on the special layers 01AKL1 and 01AKL2. As described above, while the strobe display can be executed in the range of the image drawn on the specific layer, there may be a limitation as a limit that the strobe display is not executed in the range of the image drawn on the special layer. In addition to the strobe display, a pause display may be displayed. The pause display is an effect display that gives the impression that the progress of the effect by displaying the image is paused by continuously displaying the same image over a predetermined number of consecutive frames. In addition, when the strobe display is not executed, the pause display may be performed.

FIG. 9-8 shows an example of determining the drawing effect pattern. For example, in the effect control process process of step S76, when the variable display start setting process is executed in step S171, a plurality of drawings are drawn at a ratio corresponding to the variable display result and the reach effect content as shown in FIG. 9-8. It suffices if one of the production patterns can be determined. When a variable display pattern corresponding to the reach effect of super reach is specified, the CPU 91AK131 extracts a random number value for determining the drawing effect pattern, and based on the random number value, according to the variable display result and the reach effect content, The drawing effect pattern may be determined by referring to the drawing effect pattern determination table.

In the determination example shown in FIG. 9-8, when the variable display result is "missing" and the reach effect content is any of SP reach A1 to A3, the drawing is performed at a ratio of 60% (= 60/100). The effect pattern 02AKA01 is determined, the drawing effect pattern 02AKA02 is determined at a rate of 10% (= 10/100), and the drawing effect pattern 02AKAB01 is determined at a rate of 10% (= 10/100), and 5% (= 5). The drawing effect pattern 02AKB02 is determined at the ratio of / 100), the drawing effect pattern 02AKB11 is determined at the ratio of 10% (= 10/100), and the drawing effect pattern 02AKB12 is determined at the ratio of 5% = (5/100). Will be done. On the other hand, when the variable display result is "big hit" and the reach effect content is any of SP reach A1 to A3, the drawing effect pattern 02AKA01 is determined at a rate of 5% (= 5/100). The drawing effect pattern 02AKA02 is determined at a rate of 10% (= 10/100), the drawing effect pattern 02AKA2 is determined at a rate of 15% (= 15/100), and the drawing effect pattern 02AKA2 is determined at a rate of 20% (= 20/100). The drawing effect pattern 02AKB02 is determined, the drawing effect pattern 02AKB11 is determined at a rate of 20% (= 20/100), and the drawing effect pattern 02AKB12 is determined at a rate of 30% (= 30/100). Due to such a determination ratio, the variable display result becomes a "big hit" between the drawing effect pattern 02AKA01 and the drawing effect pattern other than the drawing effect pattern 02AKA01, and the ratio controlled to the big hit game state is different.

The drawing effect pattern 02AKA01 is a pattern that does not execute a specific drawing effect, which is a drawing effect by effect display or strobe display. On the other hand, the drawing effect patterns 02AKA02, 02AKAB01, 02AKB02, 02AKB11, 02AKB12 are patterns for executing a specific drawing effect by one or both of the effect display and the strobe display. Then, among the cases where the reach effect content is any of SP reach A1 to A3, when the variable display result is "big hit", the drawing effect pattern 02AKA01 is higher than when the variable display result is "miss". The ratio of drawing effect patterns other than the above is increased. Therefore, when the reach effect content is any of SP reach A1 to A3, when the specific drawing effect which is the drawing effect by the effect display or the strobe display is executed, the specific drawing effect is not executed as compared with the case where the specific drawing effect is not executed. , The variable display result becomes "big hit", and the ratio of being controlled to the big hit game state increases. Further, in the drawing effect patterns other than the drawing effect pattern 02AKA01, the determination ratio is set according to the variable display result so that the ratio of being controlled to the jackpot game state is higher than that of the drawing effect pattern 02AKA01.

When the reach effect content is SP reach B, it is possible to determine only the drawing effect pattern 02AKA01, and a restriction is provided so that it is not determined other than the drawing effect pattern 02AKA01. When the reach effect content is SP reach B, the reach effect of super reach, which is a "strong SP reach" with higher jackpot reliability than the case of SP reach A1 to A3, is executed. In such a case, if a specific drawing effect by effect display or strobe display is executed, it becomes difficult for the player to visually recognize the reach effect of the super reach with high jackpot reliability, which may reduce the game interest. is there. Therefore, in the range where the reach effect content is SP reach B, there is a limit as a limit that the specific drawing effect by the effect display or the strobe display is not executed. As a result, it is possible to prevent the player's attention from being hindered by the reach effect of the super reach having a high jackpot reliability, and to appropriately improve the game entertainment.

When the reach effect content is any of SP reach A1 to A3, it is possible to determine the drawing effect pattern 02AKA01, 02AKA02, 02AKAB01, 02AKAB02, 02AKB11, 02AKB12 at different ratios according to the variable display result. .. When the reach effect content is any of SP reach A1 to A3, the reach effect of super reach, which is a "weak SP reach" with a lower jackpot reliability than the case of SP reach B, is executed. In such a case, when the specific drawing effect by the effect display or the strobe display is executed, the variable display result becomes "big hit" and the ratio of being controlled to the big hit game state increases. In this way, when the reach effect content is any of SP reach A1 to A3, the ratio of being controlled to the jackpot game state is increased by executing the specific drawing effect, so that the jackpot reliability is low. Even in the case of the reach effect of, the player's expectation can be raised by executing the specific drawing effect, and the game entertainment can be appropriately improved.

Even when the reach effect content is SP reach B, it may be possible to determine the drawing effect pattern other than the drawing effect pattern 02AKA01 at a predetermined ratio. However, when the reach effect content is SP reach B, it may be possible to determine other than the drawing effect pattern 02AKA01 at a lower rate than when the reach effect content is SP reach A1 to A3. In this way, in the range where the reach effect content is SP reach B, there is a limit that the specific drawing effect by the effect display or strobe display can be executed at a lower rate than the range where the reach effect content is SP reach A1 to A3. May be limited as.

FIG. 9-9 (A) shows the effect execution period in the variable display of the super reach. When the variable display of the super reach is executed, the period from the start of the variable display to the end of the variable display can be divided into a plurality of effect execution periods such as the effect execution periods D0 to D4. The effect execution period D0 is a period from the start of the variable display to the start of the execution of the reach effect after the reach is established. The effect execution period D1 is a period from the start of the reach effect execution period in which the reach effect that becomes the super reach is executed to the start of the chance up effect execution period in which the chance up effect can be executed. The effect execution period D2 is a period from the start of the chance-up effect execution period to the start of the result notification effect execution period in which the result notification effect can be executed after the chance-up effect execution period ends. The result notification effect may be an effect that notifies the effect result corresponding to the display result of the variable display in the reach effect that becomes the super reach. The effect execution period D3 is a period from the start to the end of the result notification effect execution period. The effect execution period D4 is a period from the end of the result notification effect execution period to the end of the variable display.

FIG. 9-9 (B) shows an effect control example 02AKC01 in each effect execution period. Of the plurality of effect execution periods D0 to D4, in the effect execution period D2 from the start of the chance-up effect execution period to the start of the result notification effect execution period, the specific drawing effect SPE is performed when the drawing effect pattern 02AKA01 is other than Become feasible. In the case of the drawing effect pattern 02AKA01, since the specific drawing effect SPE is not executed, the specific drawing effect SPE is not executed even during the effect execution period D2, and the normal drawing effect NOR can be executed.

Of the plurality of effect execution periods D0 to D4, in the effect execution period D0 from the start of the variable display to the start of the reach effect of the super reach, regardless of whether the drawing effect pattern 02AKA01 or other than the drawing effect pattern 02AKA01. , The specific drawing effect SPE is not executed, and the normal drawing effect NOR can be executed. For example, in the effect execution period D0, when the variable display of the decorative pattern is started, if it is possible to execute a light emission effect using the game effect lamp 9 or other decorative LEDs in response to BGM and sound effect output. Good. Further, in the effect execution period D0, when the decorative symbols are stopped and displayed (temporarily stopped) in the decorative symbol display areas 5L and 5R of "left" and "right", or "left", "middle", and "right". When the decorative symbols that make up the pseudo-continuous chance eyes are stopped and displayed in the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R, the game effect lamp 9 and other decorative LEDs are used in response to BGM and sound effect output. It may be possible to carry out a light emitting effect using. In addition, during the entire effect execution period D0, the normal drawing effect NOR is executed, and in response to the BGM and sound effect output during the execution of the variable display, the game effect lamp 9 and other decorative LEDs are used to emit light. The effect may be executable.

Among the effect execution periods D1 to D4 in which the reach effect of super reach is executed during the execution of the variable display, the drawing effect pattern 02AKA01 or other than the drawing effect pattern 02AKA01 in the effect execution period D1 following the effect execution period D0. Regardless of the above, the specific drawing effect SPE is not executed and the normal drawing effect NOR can be executed. In the effect execution period D2 after the effect execution period D1, the normal drawing effect NOR can be executed when the drawing effect pattern 02AKA01 is used, and the specific drawing effect SPE can be executed when the drawing effect pattern 02AKA01 is other than the drawing effect pattern 02AKA01. is there. In the normal drawing effect NOR by the drawing effect pattern 02AKA01, the image drawn by the normal drawing process can be displayed. In the specific drawing effect SPE other than the drawing effect pattern 02AKA01, for example, the image drawn by the specific drawing process can be displayed on 01AKL3 to 01AKL5 which are the specific layers. Even when the specific drawing effect SPE other than the drawing effect pattern 02AKA01 is executed, for example, the layers 01AKL1 and 01AKL2, which are special layers, may display an image drawn by the normal drawing process.

In the effect execution period D3 and the effect execution period D4 after the effect execution period D2, the specific drawing effect SPE is not executed and the normal drawing effect NOR is not executed regardless of whether the drawing effect pattern 02AKA01 or other than the drawing effect pattern 02AKA01. Becomes executable. In the effect execution period D3, similarly to the effect execution period D2, the normal drawing effect NOR can be executed when the drawing effect pattern 02AKA01 is used, and the specific drawing effect SPE can be executed when the drawing effect pattern 02AKA01 is not used. It may be. When the specific drawing effect SPE can be executed in the effect execution period D3, the execution of the specific drawing effect SPE is normally drawn in the effect execution period D4 for confirming and notifying the fixed decorative symbol that is the variable display result. It suffices to return to the execution of the production NOR. Further, the specific drawing effect SPE may be executed in all of the plurality of effect execution periods D1 to D4. Prior to the variable display in which the reach effect of the super reach is executed, the execution of the specific drawing effect SPE can be started based on the determination result that the reach effect of the super reach is executed as the judgment result at the time of starting winning. You may do so. Even when the specific drawing effect SPE can be executed in a period other than the effect execution period D2, for example, in 01AKL3 to 01AKL5 which are specific layers, as in the case of executing the specific drawing effect SPE in the effect execution period D2. An image drawn by a specific drawing process can be displayed. For example, layers 01AKL1 and 01AKL2, which are special layers, may display an image drawn by a normal drawing process.

When the normal drawing effect NOR is executed even in a period other than the effect execution period D0 among the plurality of effect execution periods D0 to D4, a light emitting effect using a light emitting member such as a game effect lamp 9 or other decorative LEDs is performed. It is feasible. On the other hand, when the specific drawing effect SPE is executed during the effect execution period D2 or the like, it is controlled so that the light emission effect is not executed. For example, when the specific drawing effect SPE is executed, the light emitting member such as the game effect lamp 9 and other decorative LEDs may be turned off so that the light emitting effect is not executed. As described above, when the normal drawing effect NOR capable of displaying the image drawn by the normal drawing process is executed, the light emitting effect by the light emitting member such as the game effect lamp 9 can be executed. On the other hand, when the specific drawing effect SPE capable of displaying the image drawn by the specific drawing process is executed, the light emitting effect by the light emitting member such as the game effect lamp 9 is not executed. Therefore, within the range of the effect execution period in which the normal drawing effect NOR that can display the image drawn by the normal drawing process is executed, the light emission effect by the light emission of the light emitting member can be executed, while the image drawn by the specific drawing process is executed. In the range of the effect execution period in which the specific drawing effect SPE capable of displaying the image is executed, there is a limit as a limit that the light emission effect by the light emission of the light emitting member is not executed. When the specific drawing effect SPE by effect display or strobe display is executed, by not executing the light emission effect, an appropriate image that the player can easily recognize the image drawn by the specific drawing process. The display can improve the game entertainment.

When the specific drawing effect SPE is executed during the effect execution period D2 or the like, the specific drawing effect SPE is not limited to the one provided with the restriction that the light emission effect by the light emission of the light emitting member is not executed. There may be restrictions on the mode of effect of the light emission effect, such as reducing the amount of effect of the light emission effect. When the specific drawing effect SPE is executed, the amount of light emitted (luminance) of the light emitting member in the light emitting effect is reduced as compared with the case where the normal drawing effect NOR is executed, so that the amount of effect is reduced. It may be provided. Alternatively, when the specific drawing effect SPE is executed, the amount of effect is limited to be reduced by reducing the number of light emitting members capable of emitting light in the light emitting effect as compared with the case where the normal drawing effect NOR is executed. May be provided. Alternatively, when the specific drawing effect SPE is executed, the amount of effect is reduced by reducing the emission color used in the light emission effect (for example, single color emission) as compared with the case where the normal drawing process NOR is executed. Restrictions may be provided as such.

9-10 to 9-13 show execution examples of reach effect and drawing effect. FIG. 9-10 shows an example of effect execution when the drawing effect pattern 02AKA01 is determined among the cases where the reach effect that becomes the super reach is executed. FIG. 9-11 shows an example of effect execution in the effect execution period D2 when the drawing effect pattern 02AKA02 is determined. FIG. 9-12 shows an example of effect execution in the effect execution period D2 when the drawing effect pattern 02AKB02 is determined. FIG. 9-13 shows an example of effect execution in the effect execution period D2 when the drawing effect pattern 02AKB12 is determined.

FIG. 9-10 (A) shows an effect execution example 02AKM01 in the case where the variable display mode of the decorative symbol is the reach mode and the reach is established. At this time, in the "left" and "right" decorative symbol display areas 5L and 5R, the common decorative symbols corresponding to the numbers "7" are aligned and stopped (temporarily stopped) to establish reach. , The reach production of normal reach is executed. In the case of the effect execution example 02 AKM01, the normal drawing effect NOR accompanied by the light emission effect can be appropriately executed corresponding to the effect execution period D0. For example, it suffices if it is possible to execute a light emitting effect using a light emitting member such as a game effect lamp 9 or other decorative LEDs in response to BGM and sound effect output from the establishment of reach to the development of super reach.

FIG. 9-10 (B) shows an effect execution example 02 AKM02 in the case where the reach effect of the normal reach shifts to the reach effect of the super reach in response to the start of the effect execution period D1. 9-10 (C) and 9-10 (D) show the effect execution examples 02AKM03 and 02AKM04 when the reach effect of the super reach progresses in the effect execution period D1. In the case of the effect execution example 02AKM02 to 02AKM04, the normal drawing effect NOR accompanied by the light emission effect can be executed regardless of the determination result of the drawing effect pattern, corresponding to the effect execution period D1, and the specific drawing effect can be executed. Do not run SPE.

FIG. 9-10 (E) shows an effect execution example 02 AKM05 when the chance-up effect during reach is executed in the effect execution period D2. FIG. 9-10 (F) shows an effect execution example 02AKM06 in the case where the reach effect after the chance-up effect is executed in the effect execution period D2. In the case of the effect execution example 02AKAM05 and 02AKAM06, the normal drawing effect NOR accompanied by the light emission effect by the drawing effect pattern 02AKA01 is executed corresponding to the effect execution period D2. At this time, since the drawing effect pattern 02AKA01, the specific drawing effect SPE by the effect display or the strobe display is not executed.

FIG. 9-10 (G) shows an effect execution example 02AKM07 when the result notification effect is executed in the effect execution period D3. At this time, as the reach effect of the super reach, a reach effect in which the effect content is different according to the variable display result is executed, and the decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R of "left", "middle", and "right" are displayed. Then, the fixed decorative pattern is temporarily stopped and displayed by shaking display or the like. In the case of the effect execution example 02AKM07, the normal drawing effect NOR accompanied by the light emission effect can be executed regardless of the determination result of the drawing effect pattern, corresponding to the effect execution period D3, and the specific drawing effect SPE can be performed. Do not execute.

FIG. 9-10 (H) shows an effect execution example 02AKM08 when the final notification of the variable display result is executed in the effect execution period D4. At this time, as the reach effect of the super reach ends, the fixed decorative symbol is stopped and displayed by the complete stop display. In the case of the effect execution example 02AKM08, the normal drawing effect NOR accompanied by the light emission effect can be executed regardless of the determination result of the drawing effect pattern, corresponding to the effect execution period D4, and the specific drawing effect SPE can be performed. Do not execute.

FIG. 9-11 (A) shows an effect execution example 02 AKM 11 when the chance-up effect during reach is executed corresponding to the start of the effect execution period D2. The effect display at this time may be the same as the effect display in the effect execution example 02 AKM05. However, the pause display may be started in response to the drawing effect pattern 02AKA02. For example, the image drawn on the layers 01AKL3 to 01AKL5, which are the specific layers, may be copied to the copy area provided in the VRAM 91AK147 and stored in a reusable manner. In addition, it is controlled not to execute the light emission effect in response to the execution of the specific drawing effect SPE by the strobe display.

FIG. 9-11 (B) shows an effect execution example 02 AKM 12 when strobe display is executed following the effect execution example 02 AKM 11. In the case of the effect execution example 02AKM12, an image that is entirely black is drawn and displayed as a single-color image on the layers 01AKL3 to 01AKL5 that are specific layers. At this time, the layers 01AKL1 and 01AKL2, which are special layers, may display an image drawn by the normal drawing process.

FIG. 9-11 (C) shows the effect execution example 02 AKM 13 in the case of executing the effect display which is the pause display during the strobe display, following the effect execution example 02 AKM 12. In the case of the effect execution example 02AKM13, it is sufficient that the pause display can be executed during the strobe display by repeating the pause display started in the effect execution example 02AKM11. For example, in layers 01AKL3 to layer 01AKL5, which are specific layers, by drawing an image read from the copy area of VRAM91AK147, the same image pause as in the effect execution example 02AKM11 may be paused and displayed repeatedly.

FIG. 9-11 (D) shows an effect execution example 02AKM 14 that repeatedly displays an image similar to the effect execution example 02 AKM 12 following the effect execution example 02 AKM 13. FIG. 9-11 (E) shows an effect execution example 02AKM15 that repeatedly displays the same images as the effect execution examples 02AKM11 and 02AKM13, following the effect execution example 02AKM14. FIG. 9-11 (F) shows an effect execution example 02AKM16 that repeatedly displays the same images as the effect execution examples 02AKM12 and 02AKM14, following the effect execution example 02AKM15. FIG. 9-11 (G) shows an effect execution example 02AKM17 in which the same images as those of the effect execution examples 02AKM11, 02AKM13, and 02AKM15 are repeatedly displayed following the effect execution example 02AKM16. FIG. 9-11 (H) shows an effect execution example 02AKM18 that repeatedly displays the same images as the effect execution examples 02AKM12, 02AKM14, and 02AKM16, following the effect execution example 02AKM17. In this way, by alternately and repeatedly switching and displaying the image drawn using the image data and the image of a single color having a setting different from the image data, it is possible to perform the strobe display and the pause display. .. Production Execution Example 02 After the strobe display of the AKM18 is completed, the normal drawing effect NOR is returned to the execution, and the light emission effect is controlled to be executed.

Such a strobe display can be executed without using dedicated image data by using an image with a setting different from the image data according to the drawing command transferred from the CPU 91AK131 to the VDP91AK132. As a result, even if the effect image is drawn using common image data, the specific drawing effect SPE by strobe display can be executed according to the drawing command, so that the normal drawing effect NOR can be used by the player. Since different impressions can be given, it is possible to improve the enjoyment of the game by executing various display effects while preventing the amount of image data from increasing.

In FIG. 9-12 (A), when the chance-up effect during reach is executed in response to the start of the effect execution period D2, the specific drawing effect SPE by the monochrome conversion effect corresponding to the drawing effect pattern 02AKB02 is executed. The production execution example 02 AKM21 is shown. The effect display at this time is different from the effect display in the effect execution example 02AKM05 in that the layer 01AKL3 to 01AKL5, which are the specific layers, display the image drawn by the monochrome conversion calculation process, which is the specific drawing process. doing.

FIG. 9-12 (B) shows the effect execution example 02 AKM 22 when the strobe display is executed following the effect execution example 02 AKM 21. In the case of the effect execution example 02AKM22, similarly to the effect execution example 02AKM12 and the like, the layers 01AKL3 to 01AKL5, which are specific layers, draw and display an image that is entirely black as a single color image. At this time, the layers 01AKL1 and 01AKL2, which are special layers, may display an image drawn by the normal drawing process.

FIG. 9-12 (C) shows an effect execution example 02AKM23 in which, following the effect execution example 02AKM22, a specific drawing effect SPE by a monochrome conversion effect corresponding to the drawing effect pattern 02AKB02 is executed during the execution of the chance-up effect during reach. Is shown. In the case of the effect execution example 02 AKM23, it suffices if the chance-up effect during reach started in the effect execution example 02 AKM 21 can be continuously executed. It should be noted that the pause display may be executed as a chance-up effect during the strobe display. Alternatively, in the specific drawing effect SPE by the monochrome conversion effect, even when the strobe display is executed, the image drawn using the image data read out according to the elapsed time is displayed as in the case of the effect execution example 02AKM05. The pause display of the chance-up effect may not be executed.

FIG. 9-12 (D) shows an effect execution example 02 AKM 24 that repeatedly displays an image similar to the effect execution example 02 AKM 22 following the effect execution example 02 AKM 23. FIG. 9-12 (E) shows an effect execution example 02 AKM 25 in the case where the reach effect after the chance-up effect in the effect execution period D2 is executed following the effect execution example 02 AKM 24. The effect display at this time is different from the effect display in the effect execution example 02AKM06 in that the images drawn by the monochrome conversion calculation process or the like, which is the specific drawing process, are displayed in the layers 01AKL3 to 01AKL5, which are the specific layers. doing.

FIG. 9-12 (F) shows an effect execution example 02AKM26 that repeatedly displays the same images as the effect execution examples 02AKM22 and 02AKM24, following the effect execution example 02AKM25. FIG. 9-12 (G) shows an effect execution example 02 AKM 27 when a reach effect after the effect execution example 02 AKM 25 in the effect execution period D2 is executed following the effect execution example 02 AKM 26. In the case of the effect execution example 02AKM27, it is sufficient that the reach effect executed in the effect execution example 02AKM25 can be continuously executed. It should be noted that the pause display may be executed as the reach effect during the strobe display, or the pause display may not be executed as the specific drawing effect SPE by the color information conversion effect. FIG. 9-12 (H) shows an effect execution example 02 AKM 28 that repeatedly displays the same images as the effect execution examples 02 AKM 22, 02 AKM 24, and 02 AKM 26, following the effect execution example 02 AKM 27. In this way, the image by monochrome conversion drawn by reducing the number of colors of the color information by monochrome conversion calculation processing using the image data and the image of a single color by the setting different from the image data are alternately and repeatedly switched. By displaying the image, the specific drawing effect SPE by the monochrome conversion effect can be executed together with the strobe display.

The effect display, which is a monochrome conversion effect, is a dedicated image using an image drawn with a smaller number of colors than the color information included in the image data according to the drawing command for the effect transferred from the CPU 91AK131 to the VDP91AK132. It can be executed regardless of the data. As a result, even if the effect image is drawn using common image data, the specific drawing effect SPE by the monochrome conversion effect can be executed according to the effect drawing command. Since the impression given to the player can be made different, it is possible to improve the interest of the game by executing various display effects while preventing the amount of image data from increasing. In addition, by combining the effect display, which is a monochrome conversion effect, with the strobe display, the player can easily recognize the color change of the displayed image, and the display effect is prevented while preventing the amount of image data from increasing. It is possible to enhance the impression of the game and improve the game entertainment.

In FIG. 9-13 (A), when the chance-up effect during reach is executed in response to the start of the effect execution period D2, the specific drawing effect SPE by the color information inversion effect corresponding to the drawing effect pattern 02AKB12 is executed. The production execution example 02AKM31 to be performed is shown. The effect display at this time is an image drawn by converting the color information value by the differential calculation process or the like, which is the specific drawing process, in the layers 01AKL3 to 01AKL5, which are the specific layers, as compared with the effect display in the effect execution example 02AKM05. Is different in that is displayed.

FIG. 9-13 (B) shows the effect execution example 02 AKM 32 when the strobe display is executed following the effect execution example 02 AKM 31. In the case of the effect execution example 02AKM32, similarly to the effect execution examples 02AKM12, 02AKM22 and the like, the layers 01AKL3 to 01AKL5, which are specific layers, draw and display an image of black as a whole as a single color image. At this time, the layers 01AKL1 and 01AKL2, which are special layers, may display an image drawn by the normal drawing process.

FIG. 9-13 (C) shows an effect execution example in which, following the effect execution example 02AKM32, a specific drawing effect SPE by the color information inversion effect corresponding to the drawing effect pattern 02AKB12 is executed during the execution of the chance-up effect during reach. It shows 02AKM33. In the case of the effect execution example 02AKM33, it is sufficient that the chance-up effect during reach started in the effect execution example 02AKM31 can be continuously executed. It should be noted that the pause display may be executed as a chance-up effect during the strobe display. Alternatively, in the specific drawing effect SPE by the color information inversion effect, even when the strobe display is executed, the image drawn using the image data read according to the elapsed time is displayed as in the case of the effect execution example 02AKM05. , The pause display of the chance-up effect may not be executed.

FIG. 9-13 (D) shows the effect execution example 02AKM34 that repeatedly displays the same image as the effect execution example 02AKM32, following the effect execution example 02AKM33. FIG. 9-13 (E) shows the effect execution example 02AKM35 when the reach effect after the chance-up effect is executed in the effect execution period D2, following the effect execution example 02AKM34. The effect display at this time is an image drawn by converting the value of the color information by the differential calculation process or the like, which is the specific drawing process, in the layers 01AKL3 to 01AKL5, which are the specific layers, as compared with the effect display in the effect execution example 02AKM06. Is different in that is displayed.

FIG. 9-13 (F) shows an effect execution example 02AKM36 that repeatedly displays the same images as the effect execution examples 02AKM32 and 02AKM034, following the effect execution example 02AKM35. FIG. 9-13 (G) shows an effect execution example 02 AKM 37 in the case where the reach effect after the effect execution example 02 AKM 35 in the effect execution period D2 is executed following the effect execution example 02 AKM 36. In the case of the effect execution example 02AKM37, it suffices if the reach effect executed in the effect execution example 02AKM35 can be continuously executed. It should be noted that the pause display may be executed as the reach effect during the strobe display, or the pause display may not be executed as the specific drawing effect SPE by the color information conversion effect. FIG. 9-13 (H) shows an effect execution example 02AKM38 that repeatedly displays the same images as the effect execution examples 02AKM32, 02AKM34, and 02AKM36, following the effect execution example 02AKM37. In this way, the image by the color information inversion drawn by converting the value of the color information by the difference calculation processing using the image data and the image of a single color by the setting different from the image data are alternately and repeatedly switched. By displaying the image, it is possible to execute the specific drawing effect SPE by the color information inversion effect together with the strobe display.

The effect display, which is the color information inversion effect, is dedicated image data using an image drawn by converting the value of the color information included in the image data according to the drawing command for the effect transferred from the CPU 91AK131 to the VDP91AK132. It is feasible regardless. As a result, even if the effect image is drawn using common image data, the specific drawing effect SPE by the color information inversion effect can be executed according to the effect drawing command, so that the normal drawing effect NOR can be executed. Can give different impressions to the player, so that it is possible to improve the enjoyment of the game by executing various display effects while preventing the amount of image data from increasing. In addition, by combining the effect display, which is a color information inversion effect, and the strobe display, the player can easily recognize the color change of the displayed image, and the display is displayed while preventing the amount of image data from increasing. It is possible to enhance the impression of the production and improve the game entertainment.

By executing the specific drawing effect SPE by the effect display or the strobe display, it is possible to give the player a sense of discomfort in the display effect that is not found in the normal drawing effect NOR. When the reach effect content is any of SP reach A1 to A3, the reach effect of super reach, which is a "weak SP reach" with a lower jackpot reliability than the case of SP reach B, is executed, while the reach effect is executed. It is possible to execute a specific drawing effect SPE that gives a sense of discomfort in the display effect that is not found in the normal drawing effect NOR. Then, when the specific drawing effect SPE is executed, the ratio of being controlled to the big hit game state becomes high, so that the player's expectation can be raised and the game entertainment can be appropriately improved.

The invention relating to the feature portions 01AK and 02AK is not limited to the above-described embodiment, and various modifications and applications are possible. For example, the pachinko gaming machine 1 does not have to have all the technical features related to the feature units 01AK and 02AK, and has the configuration shown in the above embodiment so as to solve at least one problem in the prior art. It may be provided with a part.

The strobe display has been described as being executed by alternately and repeatedly switching and displaying an image drawn using image data and a single-color image with settings different from the image data. In such a strobe display, a part or all of a single color image may be replaced with a specific image prepared in advance and displayed. For example, when an effect image to be a character image is inserted and displayed as a specific image, the display result of the variable display becomes a "big hit" and is controlled to a big hit game state, as compared with the case where a single color image is repeatedly displayed. The drawing effect content and the determination ratio of the drawing effect pattern may be set so that the ratio becomes high.

It has been described that when the specific drawing effect SPE is executed, the light emitting effect using the light emitting member is not executed. The light emitting effect using such a light emitting member may include a light emitting display effect by causing the display unit of the light guide plate to emit light. For example, a light guide plate as a transparent light guide member having light transmission is provided on the front side (front side) of a part or all of the display screen of the image display device 5. Further, a light emitting member such as a light guide plate LED is provided in the vicinity of the light guide plate, and light from the light emitting member is introduced through the end face of the light guide plate and reflected by a reflection portion formed in advance inside the light guide plate. Therefore, a light emitting display effect for displaying a predetermined pattern or the like may be executed. Then, in the effect execution period in which the normal drawing effect NOR is executed in response to the drawing effect pattern or the like, it is sufficient that the light emission display effect can be executed based on the determination result of the light emission display effect pattern or the like. On the other hand, it is sufficient to control so that the light emission display effect is not executed during the effect execution period in which the specific drawing effect SPE is executed in accordance with the drawing effect pattern or the like.

Further, the light emitting effect using such a light emitting member may include a button light emitting effect by causing the button light emitting unit mounted inside the push button 31B to emit light. In this case, in the effect execution period in which the normal drawing effect NOR is executed corresponding to the drawing effect pattern or the like, it is sufficient that the button light emission effect can be executed based on the determination result of the button light emission effect pattern or the like. On the other hand, it is sufficient to control so that the button light emission effect is not executed during the effect execution period in which the specific drawing effect SPE is executed in accordance with the drawing effect pattern or the like.

When a plurality of display layers are provided, the setting of whether each display layer is a special layer or a specific layer can be arbitrarily changed based on the specifications of the pachinko gaming machine 1. For example, the layer 01AKL2 that draws the effect image corresponding to the hold display or the active display so as to be displayable may be included in a specific layer instead of the special layer. In the setting in which the layer 01AKL2 is included in the specific layer, when the specific drawing effect SPE is executed, the effect image corresponding to the hold display or the active display is drawn and displayed by the specific drawing process, so that color information or the like can be obtained. May be changed. Then, when the specific drawing effect SPE by the monochrome conversion effect is executed, the effect image corresponding to the hold display or the active display may be changed to a monochrome image having a small number of colors and displayed. While enabling monochrome display of such hold display and active display, when it is possible to execute a change effect that changes the display color of a specific display related to variable display such as hold display and active display, the specific drawing effect SPE If the change effect is executed during the execution of, the execution of the specific drawing effect SPE may be terminated when the display color of the specific display is changed, and the execution of the normal drawing effect NOR may be started or restarted. The display color of the specific display may be different depending on the degree of expectation controlled by the jackpot game state. When there are a success pattern that changes the display color of the specific display and a failure pattern that does not change the display color of the specific display in the change effect, the change effect of the success pattern is executed during the execution of the specific drawing effect SPE. When the display color of the specific display changes to the specific color, the execution of the specific drawing effect SPE may be terminated and the execution of the normal drawing effect NOR may be started or restarted. Execution of the specific drawing effect SPE is started at the timing when the hold display is displayed, and after the variable display and active display corresponding to the hold display are performed, the change effect of the success pattern is executed and the display color of the active display is changed. When the color changes to a specific color, the execution of the specific drawing effect SPE may be terminated, and the execution of the normal drawing effect NOR may be started or restarted.

As the display layer included in the special layer, a direction display layer for drawing an effect image showing the launch direction of the game ball so as to be displayable may be included. For example, in the direction display layer, as an operation promotion effect that is a left-handed effect or a right-handed effect, when a launch promotion effect is executed, an effect image that prompts the game ball to be fired toward the left game area or the right game area is displayed. It suffices if it can be drawn and displayed. In the pachinko gaming machine 1, a game can be played by firing a game ball as a game medium, and a first path and a second path are provided as movement paths through which the game ball can flow down. The first route may be a right-handed route that is a right-handed game area in the game area, and the second route may be a left-handed route that is a left-handed game area in the game area. Then, when it is the first state in which it is advantageous to let the game ball flow down to the first path, the first promotion image for prompting the launch of the game medium toward the first path can be drawn and displayed on the direction display layer. It should be. In addition, when it is the second state in which it is advantageous to let the game ball flow down to the second path, a second promotion image that prompts the launch of the game medium toward the second path based on the establishment of a predetermined condition is displayed. It may be possible to draw and display on the direction display layer. In this way, by including the direction display layer in the special layer, the image drawn by the specific drawing process can be displayed in the specific layer during the effect execution period in which the specific drawing effect SPE is executed, whereas the direction is displayed. In the display layer, it is sufficient that the image drawn by the normal drawing process can be displayed. Therefore, the effect image prompting the game ball to be launched toward the left game area or the right game area may be drawn and displayed in a special layer by a normal drawing process as a predetermined image related to the game. By being able to draw and display the image that encourages the launch of the game medium by the normal drawing process instead of the specific drawing process, various display effects are executed while appropriately ensuring the visibility of the image that encourages the launch of the game medium. Then, the game entertainment can be improved.

As the operation promotion effect, an effect image indicating that the effect output amount can be changed, such as volume, screen brightness, and a part or all of the light emission amount, may be drawn and displayed. As the display layer included in the special layer, an operation display layer for drawing an effect image or the like in such an operation promotion effect so as to be displayable may be included.

As the display layer included in the special layer, a warning display layer for drawing a warning image or the like for notifying the occurrence of an abnormality in the pachinko gaming machine 1 may be included. For example, in the warning display layer, detection by various sensors such as a magnetic sensor, a radio wave sensor, a vibration sensor, a door opening sensor, a grand prize opening door sensor, a full tank sensor, and a ball burnout sensor connected to the main board 11 in the pachinko game machine 1 When it is determined that various errors have occurred based on the state, the state of the payout board, the detection state of the game ball by the start port switch, the count switch, etc., a warning image corresponding to the generated error is drawn and displayed. If possible. The warning display layer may be set to the display layer having the highest display priority among the plurality of display layers. In this way, by including the warning display layer in the special layer, the image drawn by the specific drawing process can be displayed in the specific layer during the effect execution period in which the specific drawing effect SPE is executed, whereas the warning is displayed. In the display layer, it is sufficient that the image drawn by the normal drawing process can be displayed. Therefore, the warning image for notifying the occurrence of an abnormality may be drawn and displayed on a special layer by a normal drawing process as a predetermined image related to the game. By being able to draw and display a warning image that notifies the occurrence of an abnormality by normal drawing processing instead of specific drawing processing, various display effects can be achieved while appropriately ensuring the visibility of the image that notifies the occurrence of an abnormality. It can be executed to improve the game entertainment. In the case of notifying the occurrence of an abnormality, even during the execution of the specific drawing effect SPE in which the light emission effect is not executed, the light emission notification at the time of abnormality may be executed by causing the light emitting member to emit light. In this way, the notification regarding the occurrence of the abnormality may be executed with a higher priority than other effects.

As the display layer included in the special layer, a suggestion display layer for drawing the effect image in the setting suggestion effect so as to be displayable may be included. For example, in the suggestion display layer, it is sufficient that the setting suggestion images determined at different ratios can be drawn and displayed according to the setting values in the pachinko gaming machine 1. In the pachinko gaming machine 1, it is possible to set one of a plurality of set values having different advantages for the player, and as a suggestion regarding the setting of the set value, whether or not to execute the pachinko game machine and the effect mode are set according to the set value. It suffices if it is possible to execute setting suggestion effects with different determination ratios. For example, one of a plurality of setting suggestion images may be selected at a different ratio depending on the setting value, and the selected setting suggestion image may be drawn and displayed on the suggestion display layer. In this way, by including the suggestion display layer in the special layer, the image drawn by the specific drawing process can be displayed in the specific layer during the effect execution period in which the specific drawing effect SPE is executed, whereas the suggestion is made. In the display layer, it is sufficient that the image drawn by the normal drawing process can be displayed. An image suggesting a setting value in the pachinko gaming machine 1 can be drawn and displayed on a special layer by a normal drawing process instead of a specific drawing process, so that an image suggesting a setting value having a different advantage for the player can be displayed. It is possible to improve the enjoyment of the game by executing various display effects while appropriately ensuring visibility. Alternatively, the suggestion display layer may be included in a specific layer instead of a special layer. In this way, by including the suggestion display layer in the specific layer, the image drawn by the normal drawing process can be displayed in the special layer during the effect execution period in which the specific drawing effect SPE is executed, whereas the suggestion is suggested. The display layer may display an image drawn by a specific drawing process. By making it possible to draw and display an image suggesting a setting value in the pachinko gaming machine 1 on a specific layer by a specific drawing process, the display of an image suggesting a setting value having a different advantage for the player is diversified. , The game entertainment can be improved.

At least some of the features of the pachinko gaming machine 1 can be applied not only to the pachinko gaming machine 1 but also to slot machines and the like. As an example of applying to this slot machine, when it is possible to control the assist time (also referred to as AT) which is the notification period in which the navigation notification for notifying the stop order which is advantageous for the player according to the internal lottery result can be executed. , As the navigation notification, an effect image for notifying the stop order in an identifiable manner may be displayed on the screen of the image display device. In this case, the display layer included in the special layer may include a notification display layer that draws an effect image used for navigation notification so that it can be displayed. For example, in the notification display layer, when the order of stopping the variable display by each reel on the left, middle, and right is notified, if the stop order image showing the order of the stop operation by the stop switch can be drawn and displayed on the notification display layer. Good. In this way, by including the notification display layer in the special layer, the image drawn by the specific drawing process can be displayed in the specific layer during the effect execution period in which the specific drawing effect SPE is executed, whereas the notification is displayed. In the display layer, it is sufficient that the image drawn by the normal drawing process can be displayed. The visibility of the image that notifies the operation mode can be displayed by drawing and displaying the image that notifies the operation mode when the variable display in the slot machine is stopped by the normal drawing process instead of the specific drawing process. It is possible to improve the game entertainment by executing various display effects while appropriately securing the above.

(Problem-solving means and effects of feature 01AK)
The present embodiment includes the following inventions. That is, in a gaming machine capable of performing a game such as a pachinko gaming machine, for example, as described in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2018-171129, in a gaming machine such as a pachinko gaming machine, an effect image is produced according to an instruction of a display list. Technology that enables display by tilting and deforming, and technology of a gaming machine that draws a processed image in which a plurality of deformed images generated by using inverted images are arranged, as described in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2012-29947. Was also proposed. In the gaming machine described in the above patent gazette, the visibility of an important image may be lowered because the entire image is changed. Therefore, for the purpose of providing a game machine that improves the interest of the game while appropriately ensuring the visibility of the image.
The game machine related to the feature unit 01AK is a game machine capable of executing a game, for example, a pachinko game machine 1, and uses a storage means for storing image data such as an effect data memory 91AK123 and a VRAM91AK147, and image data. It is provided with an image processing means such as VDP91AK132 capable of executing drawing processing, and the image processing means draws in response to image data, for example, normal drawing processing such as drawing processing according to a drawing command for normal display, and normal drawing processing. It is possible to execute drawing by changing at least the color information included in the image data, for example, a specific drawing process such as a drawing process according to a drawing command for an effect, and a plurality of layers having different priorities such as layers 01AKL1 to 01AKL5. An image in each of the layers can be displayed, and the plurality of layers include, for example, a specific layer such as layers AKL03 to AKL05 and a special layer having a higher priority than the specific layer, such as layers AKL01 and AKL02. According to steps 01AKS01 to 01AKS03, the specific layer can be drawn by the specific drawing process and the effect image can be displayed. For example, according to step 01AKS04, the special layer is drawn by the normal drawing process and is related to the progress of the game. A predetermined image can be displayed. As a result, it is possible to prevent an increase in the data capacity, appropriately secure the visibility of the image, enable the execution of various display effects, and improve the enjoyment of the game.

The specific drawing process may draw with a smaller number of colors than the color information included in the image data (for example, monochrome conversion), for example, monochrome conversion. As a result, while preventing an increase in the data capacity, it is possible to execute an effect with various displays and improve the game entertainment.

In the specific drawing process, the value of the color information included in the image data may be converted and drawn (for example, color information inversion), for example, color information inversion. As a result, while preventing an increase in the data capacity, it is possible to execute an effect with various displays and improve the game entertainment.

For example, as in the effect control example 02AKC01, for example, a first period (for example, the effect execution period D1) in which the specific drawing process such as the effect execution period D1 is not executed, and a second period in which the specific drawing process such as the effect execution period D2 is executed. Of a plurality of periods including a period (for example, the effect execution period D2), the light emitting means can be made to emit light in the first period, and the light emitting means may not be made to emit light in the second period. As a result, it is possible to improve the game entertainment while appropriately ensuring the visibility of the image.

Alternatively, for example, a first period in which the specific drawing process such as the effect execution period D1 is not executed (for example, the effect execution period D1) and a second period in which the specific drawing process such as the effect execution period D2 is executed (for example, the effect execution period D2). Of the plurality of periods including (such as), the light emitting means can be made to emit light in the normal mode in the first period, and the light emitting of the light emitting means may be restricted more than in the normal mode in the second period. As a result, it is possible to improve the game entertainment while appropriately ensuring the visibility of the image.

A setting value change process S6A that has different advantages for the player and can be set to any setting value (for example, a value from 1 to 6) among a plurality of setting values such as a value from 1 to 6. A setting means such as a CPU 103 to be executed (for example, a CPU 103 for executing a setting value change process S6A) is provided, and suggestions regarding the setting of the setting means are given by displaying a specific mode, for example, setting such as an effect by the effect execution examples 60AKD8 to 60AKD12. Suggestion effects (for example, effects by effect execution examples 60AKD8 to 60AKD12) can be executed, and the image drawn by the specific drawing process may not be displayed as the image displayed by the setting suggestion effect. As a result, it is possible to improve the game entertainment while appropriately ensuring the visibility of the image.

A setting value change process S6A that has different advantages for the player and can be set to any setting value (for example, a value from 1 to 6) among a plurality of setting values such as a value from 1 to 6. A setting means such as a CPU 103 to be executed (for example, a CPU 103 for executing a setting value change process S6A) is provided, and suggestions regarding the setting of the setting means are given by displaying a specific mode. The effect (for example, the effect by the effect execution examples 60AKD8 to 60AKD12) can be executed, and the image drawn by the specific drawing process may be displayed as the image displayed by the setting suggestion effect. As a result, it is possible to improve the enjoyment of the game by making it possible to perform various display effects while appropriately ensuring the visibility of the image.

For example, it may be possible to execute a specific effect (for example, a specific drawing effect by the drawing effect pattern 02AKA02) for pausing and displaying an image, such as a specific drawing effect by the drawing effect pattern 02AKA02. As a result, while preventing an increase in the data capacity, it is possible to execute an effect with various displays and improve the game entertainment.

For example, as in the production execution example 02AKM21-02AKM28, the image drawn using the image data and the monochromatic image may be alternately displayed on the specific layer (see, for example, the production execution example 02AKM21-02AKM28). As a result, while preventing an increase in the data capacity, it is possible to execute an effect with various displays and improve the game entertainment.

For example, variable display of decorative symbols in "left", "middle", and "right" decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R (for example, "left", "middle", and "right" decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, Variable display of the identification information image, such as variable display of decorative symbols in 5R), and reduction in a mode smaller than the identification information image, such as variable display of small symbols in the small symbol display area 01AKC1. Variable display of the identification information image (for example, variable display of the small symbol in the small symbol display area 01AKC1) can be executed. For example, as shown in FIG. 9-5, the identification information image is drawn and displayed by a specific drawing process. It is possible, and the reduced identification information image may be drawn and displayed by a normal drawing process. As a result, it is possible to improve the enjoyment of the game by making it possible to perform various display effects while appropriately ensuring the visibility of the image.

(Problem-solving means and effects of feature unit 02AK)
The game machine related to the feature unit 02AK is a game machine capable of executing a game, for example, a pachinko game machine 1, and uses a storage means for storing image data such as an effect data memory 91AK123 and VRAM91AK147, and image data. It is provided with an image processing means such as VDP91AK132 capable of executing drawing processing, and suggests that it is controlled to an advantageous state advantageous for the player such as a jackpot game state, for example, a specific effect such as a reach effect of super reach. The first pattern such as the drawing effect pattern 02AKA01 and the second pattern such as the drawing effect pattern 02AKA02, which can be executed during the variable display and the ratio of the specific effect controlled to the advantageous state is different, are different. Of the effect period in which the specific effect is executed, at least in the first period such as the effect execution period D1, regardless of whether it is the first pattern or the second pattern, for example, during the normal drawing effect. It is possible to display an image drawn by a normal drawing process such as a drawing process according to the drawing command of, and among the effect periods in which a specific effect is executed, a second period after the first period, for example, an effect execution period D2. In the two periods, the image drawn by the normal drawing process can be displayed in the case of the first pattern, and in the case of the second pattern, for example, a specific drawing process such as a drawing process according to a drawing command at the time of a specific drawing effect. It is possible to display the image drawn by. As a result, it is possible to prevent an increase in the data capacity and appropriately raise the expectation of the player while making it possible to execute the production by various displays, and improve the game entertainment.

The specific drawing process may draw with a smaller number of colors than the color information included in the image data, such as monochrome conversion. As a result, while preventing an increase in the data capacity, it is possible to execute an effect with various displays and improve the game entertainment.

In the specific drawing process, the value of the color information included in the image data may be converted and drawn, for example, color information inversion. As a result, while preventing an increase in the data capacity, it is possible to execute an effect with various displays and improve the game entertainment.

For example, as in the effect control example 02AKC01, it is possible to execute a light emitting effect by the light emitting means in response to the display of the image drawn by the normal drawing process in the specific effect, and to display the image drawn by the specific drawing process in the specific effect. Correspondingly, the light emission effect may not be executed. As a result, it is possible to improve the game entertainment while appropriately ensuring the visibility of the image.

Alternatively, the light emitting effect by the light emitting means can be executed in the normal mode in response to the display of the image drawn by the normal drawing process in the specific effect, and the image drawn by the specific drawing process in the specific effect can be displayed. The light emission effect may be limited more than in the normal mode. As a result, it is possible to improve the game entertainment while appropriately ensuring the visibility of the image.

It is provided with a setting means such as a CPU 103 that executes a setting value change process S6A, which can be set to any of a plurality of setting values having different advantages for the player, for example, a value from 1 to 6. It is possible to execute a setting suggestion effect such as an effect by the effect execution examples 60AKD8 to 60AKD12, for which a suggestion regarding the setting of the setting means is given by displaying a specific mode, and the image displayed by the setting suggestion effect is drawn by the specific drawing process. You may not display the image. As a result, it is possible to improve the game entertainment while appropriately ensuring the visibility of the image.

It is provided with a setting means such as a CPU 103 that executes a setting value change process S6A and can be set to any of a plurality of setting values having different advantages for the player, for example, a value from 1 to 6. It is possible to execute a setting suggestion effect such as an effect by the effect execution examples 60AKD8 to 60AKD12, in which the suggestion regarding the setting of the means is given by displaying a specific mode, and the image displayed by the setting suggestion effect is drawn by the specific drawing process. The image may be displayable. As a result, it is possible to improve the enjoyment of the game by making it possible to perform various display effects while appropriately ensuring the visibility of the image.

In the second period, it may be possible to execute an effect of pausing and displaying an image in the case of the second pattern, such as a specific drawing effect by the drawing effect pattern 02AKA02. As a result, while preventing an increase in the data capacity, it is possible to execute an effect with various displays and improve the game entertainment.

In the second period, an image drawn using the image data and a monochromatic image may be alternately displayed in the case of the second pattern, for example, as in the production execution example 02AKM21 to 02AKM28. As a result, while preventing an increase in the data capacity, it is possible to execute an effect with various displays and improve the game entertainment.

For example, variable display of identification information images such as variable display of decorative symbols in "left", "middle", and "right" decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R, and small symbols in small symbol display area 01AKC1, for example. It is possible to perform variable display of the reduced identification information image in a mode smaller than that of the identification information image, such as variable display of the identification information image. For example, as shown in FIG. 9-5, the identification information image is subjected to a specific drawing process. It can be drawn and displayed, and the reduced identification information image may be drawn and displayed by a normal drawing process. As a result, it is possible to improve the enjoyment of the game by making it possible to perform various display effects while appropriately ensuring the visibility of the image.

The configurations relating to the feature portions 01AK and 02AK may be appropriately combined with some or all of the configurations relating to the feature portions 91AK and 92AK and the configurations relating to the feature portion 60AK. For example, in the configuration in which the operation effect to be executed after the elapse of a predetermined period can be executed as the setting suggestion effect which is the operation effect of the suggestion effect mode, the first component in the display period of the character image added to the moving image of 1. And the second component can be changed, or a character image using data related to a common character image is added to the first moving image and the second moving image different from the first moving image. In the configuration that can be displayed, the specific layer can be drawn by the specific drawing process and the effect image can be displayed, and the special layer having a higher priority than the specific layer is drawn by the normal drawing process. A predetermined image related to the progress of the game may be displayed, and in the second period after the first period, the image drawn by the normal drawing process in the case of the first pattern can be displayed. When the second pattern is different from the first pattern in the ratio controlled in an advantageous state, the image drawn by the specific drawing process may be displayed.

(Explanation of feature 75SG)
Next, the pachinko gaming machine 75SG001 of the feature portion 75SG in the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 10-1 to 10-26. FIG. 10-1 is a front view showing a pachinko gaming machine as the feature portion 75SG. FIG. 10-2 is a configuration diagram showing various control boards mounted on the pachinko gaming machine as the feature portion 75SG. FIG. 10-3 is a front view showing a gaming board of a pachinko gaming machine as a feature portion 75SG. FIG. 10-4 is a sectional view taken along the line AA of FIG. 10-3. In the following description, the direction in which the player is located is the front of the pachinko gaming machine 75SG001, and the opposite direction is the rear. Further, the description will be described with reference to the up, down, left, and right directions as viewed from the player located in front of the pachinko gaming machine 75SG001. Further, the same parts as those in the above embodiment are designated by the same reference numerals, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

As shown in FIGS. 10-1 to 10-4, the pachinko gaming machine 75SG001 includes a gaming board 2 (also referred to as a gauge board 2) constituting the game board surface and a game machine frame 3 (also referred to as a gauge board 2) for supporting and fixing the game board 2. It is also called the underframe 3). A game area Y is formed on the game board 2, and a game ball as a game medium is launched from a predetermined hit ball launching device and hit into the game area Y. Further, the game machine frame 3 is provided with a glass door frame 50 having a glass window 50a so as to be rotatable around the left side, and the game area Y can be opened and closed by the glass door frame 50. When the glass door frame 50 is closed, the game area Y can be seen through the glass window 50a.

The game board 2 is formed of a translucent (transparent) synthetic resin material such as acrylic resin, polycarbonate resin, and methacrylic resin in a substantially square shape in front view, and an obstacle nail (not shown) is formed on the front surface of the game board. , A board surface plate 200 provided with a guide rail 211, an outer rail decoration 212, and the like, and a spacer member 201 integrally attached to the back surface side of the board surface plate 200. The game board 2 is formed of a non-translucent member such as a veneer board in a substantially square shape in front view, and is provided on a board surface board provided with obstacle nails (not shown), guide rails 211, etc. on the front game board surface. May be configured.

An opening 2c is formed in the board surface plate 200 and the spacer member 201 of the game board 2, and the display area of the image display device 5 provided at a position away from the game board 2 on the back side is passed through the opening 2c on the player side. It can be visually recognized from (front side). Further, in the display area of the image display device 5, the area overlapping the board surface plate 200 is visible through the board surface plate 200.

Further, a center decorative frame 51 is attached to the opening 2c of the board surface plate 200, and the area surrounded by the center decorative frame 51, the guide rail 211, and the outer rail decoration 212 is the flow area of the game ball in the game area Y. Has been done. Further, a light guide plate device 500, which will be described later, is provided at a position corresponding to the opening 2c surrounded by the center decorative frame 51.

The first effect unit 300 is provided at the lower position on the back side of the board plate 200, that is, at the lower position of the image display device 5. The second effect unit 400 is provided on the right side of the area surrounded by the center decorative frame 51, that is, at a position corresponding to the right side of the display area of the image display device 5. A third effect unit 600 is provided at a position corresponding to the upper part of the area surrounded by the center decorative frame 51, that is, the upper part of the display area of the image display device 5. The fourth effect unit 800 is provided at the upper left position on the back side of the board plate 200, that is, at the position on the upper left side of the image display device 5. Further, at the lower right position of the board surface plate 200, a variable winning ball unit 700 capable of winning a game ball flowing down the game area Y is provided.

Since the first effect unit 300 and the fourth effect unit 800 are provided on the back side of the board surface plate 200, they can be seen through the board surface plate 200 from the player side (front side of the pachinko gaming machine 75SG001). ing. On the other hand, the second effect unit 400 and the third effect unit 600 are located at least in front of the game board surface whose front surface is the front surface of the board surface plate 200, and are arranged in the opening 2c. It is visible from the player side through the light guide plate 501 of 500.

(Light guide plate device 500)
Next, the light guide plate device 500 will be described with reference to FIGS. 10-5 and 10-6. FIG. 10-5 is a front view showing the light guide plate device. 10-6 is an enlarged front view showing a main part of the light guide plate device, (B) is a sectional view taken along line BB of (A), and (C) is an enlarged view showing a main part of (B). Is. Here, in order to help understanding, the light emitting region 506 is indicated by dots (halftone dots), and the non-emission region 507 without dots (halftone dots) is indicated by white.

As shown in FIGS. 10-5 and 10-6, the light guide plate device 500 includes a light guide plate 501 provided so as to close the area surrounded by the center decorative frame 51 except for the right side and the lower area. A collection of LED substrates 503 on which a plurality of light guide plate LEDs 502 for incident light on the right end surface 501a of the light guide plate 501 and light from the light guide plate LED 502 are collected toward the right end surface 501a of the light guide plate 501. It mainly has an optical lens 504. The light guide plate device 500 is supported by a base member (not shown) fixed to the back surface of the game board 2 or the center decorative frame 51.

The light guide plate 501 is a plate member formed of a material such as a transparent synthetic resin such as acrylic or polycarbonate having a predetermined front-rear width dimension (plate thickness = about 5 mm), and as shown in FIG. 10-4, the light guide plate 501 is a plate member. It is arranged in front of the third effect unit 600 and close to the glass window 50a.

Further, the light guide plate 501 has a light emitting region 506 as a first region for forming a predetermined light guide pattern that reflects light from the light guide plate LED 502 incident on the inside from the right end surface 501a forward and emits it from the front surface, that is, , A light emitting region (see the halftone dot region in FIGS. 10-5 and 10-6 (A)) that emits light due to light incident on the inside from the right end surface 501a of the light guide plate 501, and the inside from the right end surface 501a. The non-light emitting region 507 as a second region that does not form a predetermined light guide pattern that reflects the light from the light guide plate LED 502 forward and emits it from the front, that is, does not emit light due to the light incident inside the light guide plate 501. It has a non-light emitting region (see the white region in FIGS. 10-5 and 10-6 (A)).

The light emitting region 506 is formed so that a graphic whose peripheral edge is radial appears at a substantially central position of the light guide plate 501, and when light is incident inside the light guide plate 501, the light emitting region 506 reflects the light and moves forward. By emitting light, a predetermined image is emitted and displayed on the light guide plate 501.

As shown in FIGS. 10-6 (B) and 10-6 (C), the light emitting region 506 is in a fine uneven state so as to guide the incident light from the light guide plate LED 502 incident on the inside from the right end surface 501a and emit it from the front surface. It is formed on the back side (rough surface). Specifically, the light emitting region 506 is formed in an uneven state (rough surface) having a substantially semicircular shape with a constant pitch in a cross-sectional view when the traveling direction of light is viewed from the side. In FIG. 10-6 (C), the uneven state (rough surface) is enlarged to help understanding, but the actual light emitting region 506 is a fine size that is difficult to see with the naked eye. It is in an uneven state.

When light is incident inside from the right end surface 501a of the light guide plate 501, a predetermined image (still image) is displayed on the light guide plate 501 by a dot pattern composed of a plurality of recesses 510 formed in the light emitting region 506 (FIG. See the halftone dot region at 10-5). That is, the light emitting region 506 as the first region forming a predetermined light guide pattern that reflects the light from the light guide plate LED 502 incident on the inside from the right end surface 501a forward and emits it from the front surface is formed from the plurality of recesses 510. This is a region in which a dot pattern is formed, and is not a second region that does not form a predetermined light guide pattern that reflects light from the light guide plate LED 502 incident on the inside from the right end surface 501a forward and emits light from the front surface. The light emitting region 507 is a region in which a dot pattern composed of a plurality of recesses 510 is not formed. Further, in the feature portion 75SG, a predetermined image (graphic) is exemplified as display information that can be displayed by the light guide plate 501, but in addition to these, decorations such as a pattern, a character, a symbol, a pattern, or a pattern are also included. Other display information including may be displayable.

When no light is incident on the light guide plate 501 from the right end surface 501a, the entire light guide plate 501 including the light emitting region 506 is colorless and transparent, and the display image of the rear image display device 5 and the first The 2 effect unit 400 and the 3rd effect unit 600 can be visually recognized (perspective) from the front of the light guide plate 501. Further, in the state where the light is incident from the right end surface 501a, the portion of the light emitting region 506 emits light, but the portion other than the light emitting region 506 is maintained in a colorless and transparent state.

In the feature portion 75SG, the light emitting region 506 is formed in a concavo-convex state forming a substantially semicircular shape, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the light emitting region 506 is formed by a stamper or an injection light guide plate. It may be configured by a molding method in which an uneven portion is provided on the back surface (rear surface) of 501. In addition, the reflective part is configured by a silk printing method in which reflective dots are printed on an acrylic plate with white ink, a sticking dot method in which the acrylic plate and the reflector are attached with a dot-shaped adhesive material, a groove processing method, and the like. You may.

In the feature portion 75SG, the shape of each unevenness of the light emitting region 506 on the back surface (rear surface) of the light guide plate 501 is substantially a semicircular shape in a cross-sectional view, but the present invention is not limited to this. The cross-sectional shape of each unevenness of the light emitting region 506 can be variously deformed as long as it constitutes a reflecting surface capable of reflecting light toward the front (front surface), such as a substantially triangular shape.

The condenser lens 504 is formed in the shape of a long plate extending in the vertical direction by a translucent member such as acrylic or polycarbonate. On the surface of the condenser lens 504 on the light guide plate 501 side, a plurality of semicircular convex portions 504A that bulge toward the light guide plate 501 side when viewed from the front are continuously formed in the vertical direction. The condenser lens 504 is composed of a single member in which a plurality of convex portions 504A are integrally provided. Each convex portion 504A is formed one by one corresponding to each of the light guide plate LED 502.

The convex portion 504A is not limited to one-to-one correspondence with the light guide plate LED 502, and for example, one convex portion 504A may correspond to two or more light guide plate LEDs 502. Further, the condenser lens 504 is not limited to being composed of a single member in which a plurality of convex portions 504A are integrally provided, and a plurality of condenser lenses separately formed corresponding to the light guide plate LED 502. You may use it.

As shown in FIG. 10-6 (C), the front-rear width of the condenser lens 504 on the light guide plate 501 side is smaller than the front-rear width of the condenser lens 504 on the light guide plate LED 502 side. Further, since the front-rear width of the light guide plate 501 side of the condenser lens 504 is substantially the same as the front-rear width of the light receiving surface of the light guide plate 501, the light emitted from the condenser lens 504 is diffused in the front-rear direction. It is incident on the light guide plate 501 without leaking light.

The front surface of the condenser lens 504 is a flat inclined surface that gradually inclines backward from the light guide plate LED 502 side toward the light guide plate 501 side, and the rear surface of the condenser lens 504 is a light guide plate from the light guide plate LED 502 side. It is a flat inclined surface that gradually inclines toward the front side toward the 501 side. That is, the condenser lens 504 is formed in a tapered shape in which the thickness gradually decreases from the light guide plate LED 502 side toward the light guide plate 501 side.

Further, a slight gap is provided between the condenser lens 504 and the light guide plate 501. For example, the gap between the gaps is such that the condenser lens 504 and the light guide plate 501 do not come into contact with each other even when vibration occurs during transportation or use of the pachinko gaming machine 75SG001. As a result, it is possible to prevent the condenser lens 504 and the light guide plate 501 from being damaged by the vibration generated during the transportation and use of the pachinko gaming machine 75SG001.

Next, the light guide state of the light emitted from the light guide plate LED 502 will be described. The emitted light emitted from each light guide plate LED 502 is incident on the condenser lens 504. Here, since the incident surface of the condenser lens 504 is formed in a curved shape so as to form a lens surface, the incident surface is incident on the condenser lens 504 even when the directivity of the light emitted from the light guide plate LED 502 is high. The light to be emitted is radially diffused in the left-right direction in the condenser lens 504. Then, the light incident on the condenser lens 504 is refracted to the right and emitted when passing through the inner curved lens surface.

As a result, even when the directivity of the light emitted from the light guide plate LED 502 is high, the light emitted from the light guide plate LED 502 can be diffused radially to some extent by the condenser lens 504, and the light emitting region in the light guide plate 501 Can be expanded. Further, since the light emitted from the condenser lens 504 is guided in the horizontal direction (because it is suppressed from spreading radially), only the portion corresponding to each light guide plate LED 502 can be emitted. Further, the light incident on the light guide plate LED 502 from the light guide plate LED 502 is collected toward a substantially central position in the front-rear direction while repeating total internal reflection in the front-rear direction, and finally the light guide plate of the light guide plate 504 of the light guide plate 504. It is emitted from the end face on the 501 side (the portion having the smallest front-rear width).

With such a configuration, the light from the light guide plate LED 502 can be collected and guided to the light guide plate 501 without being diffused in the front-rear direction. In particular, even when the front-rear width of the light emitting surface of the light guide plate LED 502 is larger than the front-rear width of the light guide plate LED 502 side of the condenser lens 504, the light from the light guide plate LED 502 is not diffused in the front-rear direction. Since it can be guided to 501, it is possible to prevent the light from the light guide plate LED 502 from being diffused to the surroundings.

When the light from the condenser lens 504 is guided into the light guide plate 501 and reaches the light emitting region 506, the light is reflected in the light emitting region 506 toward the front side (player's side). As a result, from the player's point of view, the light emitting region 506 of the light guide plate 501 emits light by reflected light, so that the region represented by halftone dots in FIG. 10-5 emits surface light on the front surface of the light guide plate 501. The figure will be displayed with.

As shown in FIG. 10-4, the image display device 5 is arranged in the back and the light guide plate device 500 is arranged in the front when viewed from the player (in the front-rear direction). From the player's point of view, the image display device 5 has a horizontally long rectangular shape. For example, the image display device 5 uses a liquid crystal display device including a liquid crystal panel. The image display device 5 is not limited to the liquid crystal display device, and an EL display device such as an organic EL display device or an inorganic EL display device may be used.

(1st production unit 300)
Next, the first effect unit 300 will be described with reference to FIGS. 10-7 to 10-12. 10-7 is a front view showing the first effect unit, and FIG. 10-7 is a rear view. FIG. 10-8 is an exploded perspective view showing a state in which the configuration of the first effect unit is viewed diagonally from the front. 10-9 is a sectional view taken along the line CC of FIG. 10-7 (A), FIG. 10-9 is a sectional view taken along the line DD of FIG. 10-7 (A), and FIG. It is sectional drawing of EE of (A). 10-10 is a front view showing a base member, (B) a front view showing an LED substrate, and (C) a front view showing a cover member. 10-11 is a front view showing the first effect unit with the cover member removed, and FIG. 10-11 is a front view showing the first effect unit with the cover member attached. FIG. 10-12 is an enlarged view showing a main part of FIG. 10-11 (B).

As shown in FIGS. 10-7 to 10-9, the first effect unit 300 is arranged so as to cover the base member 301 and the front side of the base member 301, and is attached to the base member 301 by a plurality of screws N1. Mainly composed of a cover member 302 to be mounted and an LED substrate 303 attached to the front surface of the base member 301 by a plurality of screws N2, from the front of the pachinko gaming machine 75SG001, that is, from the player side facing the pachinko gaming machine 75SG001. It is provided so as to be visible through the glass window 50a and the board plate 200.

The base member 301 is formed of a non-translucent synthetic resin material in a horizontally long shape when viewed from the front, and its surfaces (front-rear surface and peripheral surface) are black. The front surface of the base member 301 includes a flat portion 311 made of a flat surface, a horizontally long rectangular concave portion 312 formed in the lower part of the flat portion 311 and a rear wall portion 313A to be located slightly behind the flat portion 311. It has 313D and.

A plurality of trapezoidal convex portions 314A to 314E forming a part of the decorative pattern 331, which will be described later, are formed in the upper portion of the flat portion 311 in the longitudinal direction, and a rear wall is formed between the convex portions 314A to 314E. The parts 313A to 313D can be visually recognized. The rear wall portions 313A to 313D are formed so as to be inclined rearward toward the upper side (see FIG. 10-9 (B)). Further, a predetermined decorative pattern 341 is engraved on the front surface of the rear wall portions 313A to 313D.

As shown in FIG. 10-9, the recess 312 has a horizontally long rectangular shape in the front view, has a depth capable of accommodating the LED substrate 303, and is formed so as to be surrounded by the flat portion 311 in the front view. ing. Then, in the state where the LED board 303 is attached, the front surface of the LED board 303 and the flat portion 311 are substantially flush with each other, and only the first effect LED 304, which will be described later, is located in front of the flat portion 311. There is. Further, the recess 312 is formed with a plurality of vertically long heat dissipation holes 315 and an opening 316 for routing a cable (not shown) connected to the LED substrate 303 to the back side.

As shown in FIGS. 10-8 to 10-9, a plurality of first effect LEDs 304 and other electronic components (not shown) capable of irradiating light toward the front are mounted on the front surface of the LED substrate 303. In addition to this, a plurality of printed wirings 320 are formed (see the enlarged view of FIG. 10-10 (B)). On the other hand, on the back surface of the LED board 303, a board-side connector CN and electronic components (not shown) for connecting a cable (not shown) to the LED board 303 are mounted. Further, the surface of the LED substrate 303 (insulating portion on the front surface and the back surface excluding the printed wiring 320) is black.

The cover member 302 is formed of a translucent (transparent) synthetic resin material in a horizontally long shape in front view, and has a first translucent portion 321 corresponding to a part of a flat portion 311 and a recess 312 of the base member 301. It mainly has second translucent portions 322A and 322B corresponding to the first effect LED 304. Further, at positions corresponding to the convex portions 314A to 314E of the base member 301, a plurality of trapezoidal convex portions 324A to 324E are formed in the longitudinal direction.

As shown in FIG. 10-9, the front surface of the second translucent portions 322A and 322B protrudes forward from the front surface of the first translucent portion 321, and the concave portion 322D is formed on the back surface. The LED 304 for the first effect can be accommodated. Further, a light diffusing portion 322C composed of fine uneven portions is formed on the back surface of the second translucent portions 322A and 322B, so that the light from the rear first effect LED 304 can be diffused and emitted forward. ing. The uneven portion may be formed by, for example, sandblasting or diamond cutting, and the forming method, shape, and the like can be variously changed.

Further, as shown in FIG. 10-10 (C), the first translucent portion 321 is provided with a plurality of decorative patterns 331 having a hexagonal front view. Specifically, one decorative pattern 331 forms a horizontally long rectangular shape in front view with a decorative portion 331A composed of a plurality of horizontal lines extending in the left-right direction and decorative portions 331B and 331C composed of inclined lines extending in the diagonally left and diagonally right directions. A plurality of decorative patterns 331 are continuously provided by having a decorative portion 331D and a decorative portion 331E having a triangular shape when viewed from the front, and by sharing the decorative portions 331A to 331C with adjacent decorative patterns 331. ..

Further, in each of these decorative portions 331A to 331E, for example, the back surface (or front surface) of the cover member 302 may be sandblasted to form fine uneven portions, or a translucent sticker or the like may be attached. As a result, each of the decorative portions 331A to 331E looks milky white or translucent when visually recognized from the player side.

As shown in FIG. 10-11 (A), the LED substrate 303 as an electronic component having the first effect LED 304 is arranged on the front side of the base member 301, and the front side thereof is covered with the cover member 302. ing. However, since the cover member 302 is made of a translucent synthetic resin material, it is possible for the player to visually recognize the front surface of the base member 301 and the LED substrate 303 through the cover member 302. is there.

Here, by arranging the same black base member 301 around (periphery) the black LED substrate 303, the LED substrate 303 is assimilated with the surrounding base member 301, and the LED substrate 303 and the cover member 302 are assimilated. The boundary part BD with is difficult to understand. That is, it becomes difficult to understand that the LED substrate 303 is provided on a part of the front surface of the base member 301, so that the LED substrate 303, which is an electronic component, becomes inconspicuous.

Next, as shown in FIG. 10-11 (B), when the cover member 302 is attached to the front side of the base member 301 with the LED substrate 303 arranged in the recess 312 of the base member 301, the base member 301 and the LED substrate are attached. The cover member 302 is positioned high so as to cover the front surface of the 303, and while it is easy for the player to visually recognize the front surface of the base member 301 and the LED substrate 303 through the first translucent portion 321. It is difficult for the player to visually recognize the first effect LED 304 through the second translucent portions 322A and 322B. Further, by arranging the milky white or translucent decorative portions 331A to 331E applied to the cover member 302 on the front side of the base member 301 and the LED substrate 303, the milky white or translucent on the front side of the black background. The decorative pattern 331 can be visually recognized.

As shown in FIG. 10-12, in a state where the cover member 302 is arranged on the front surface side of the base member 301, a predetermined decorative pattern 331 among the plurality of decorative patterns 331 (for example, the decorative patterns 331J to 331M in FIG. 10-12) Etc.) are formed (provided) so as to straddle the LED substrate 303 and the cover member 302 when visually recognized from the player side. Specifically, the decorative portions 331B and 331C composed of inclined lines are arranged so as to intersect the boundary portion BD between the LED substrate 303 and the cover member 302 facing in the left-right direction, and one decorative pattern 331 is two members (LEDs). Since it is provided so as to straddle the substrate 303 and the cover member 302), it looks as if one decorative pattern 331 is provided on one member. Therefore, the LED substrate 303 and the cover member 302 on the back side thereof It becomes difficult to recognize that is a separate member.

Further, since a part of the boundary portion BD between the LED substrate 303 and the cover member 302 is difficult to see from the player side due to the decorative portions 331B and 331C overlapping on the front side, the LED substrate 303 becomes inconspicuous. Since the decorative portions 331B and 331C are linear, even if they are arranged so as to overlap the front surface side of the boundary portion BD, the area overlapping with the boundary portion BD is small, but the decorative pattern 331 covers the LED substrate 303. Since it is formed over almost the entire front surface of the member 302, it becomes difficult to recognize that the LED substrate 303 and the cover member 302 are separate members.

Further, since the decorative portion 331A of each decorative pattern 331 is arranged substantially parallel to the boundary portion BD, the mode is similar to that of the boundary portion BD, so that it is difficult to distinguish the decorative portion 331A, and the decorative portion 331A is arranged on the front side of the boundary portion BD. In the case of milky white, which has a higher brightness than black, the LED substrate 303 becomes less noticeable. By arranging the decorative portion 331A so as to overlap along the boundary portion BD, a part of the boundary portion BD may be difficult to see from the player side by the decorative portion 331A.

Further, these decorative portions 331A to 331C are formed in a linear shape like the printed wiring 320 provided on the LED substrate 303, and are arranged substantially parallel to a part of the printed wiring 320, so that the printed wiring is printed. Since the wiring pattern and the mode of the 320 are similar (or common), it is difficult to distinguish them, so that the LED substrate 303 is not conspicuous.

Further, the decorative portions 331D and 331E are different in mode from the printed wiring 320 and the boundary portion BD, but are more conspicuous than the printed wiring 320 and the boundary portion BD because they are thicker and have a larger area than the printed wiring 320 and the boundary portion BD. Further, since a part of the printed wiring board 320 is arranged overlapping on the front side of the printed wiring board 320, the printed wiring board 320 becomes difficult to see, so that the LED substrate 303 becomes inconspicuous.

Further, on the front surface of each of the rear wall portions 313A to 313D of the base member 301, a decorative pattern 341 composed of vertically flattened hexagonal linear convex portions is provided so as to be visible from the player side. The decorative pattern 341 is similar (or common) to the wiring pattern of the printed wiring 320, so that the mode is similar to the wiring pattern of the printed wiring 320 even in the region of the base member 301 not covered by the cover member 302. Since the decorative pattern 341 can be formed, the LED substrate 303 becomes inconspicuous.

Further, the base member 301 has rear wall portions 313A to 313D as a predetermined region that can be visually recognized from the player side without passing through the cover member 302, and the rear wall portions 313A to 313D are provided on the cover member 302. Since the decorative pattern 341 as a predetermined decorative pattern having the same or similar aspect as the decorative pattern 331 is provided, it becomes difficult to understand that the base member 301 and the cover member 302 are different members. 303 becomes less noticeable.

Further, since the LED substrate 303 is arranged in the recess 312 formed in the lower part of the base member 301, the LED substrate 303 is located below the upper region of the recess 312 in the base member 301, that is, at a position separated from the image display device 5. Since it is provided, it is located at a position away from the image display device 5 that the player pays attention to, so that it is less noticeable.

As described above, the predetermined decorative pattern 331 (for example, the decorative patterns 331J to 331M in FIG. 10-12) among the plurality of decorative patterns 331 is attached to the LED substrate 303 and the cover member 302 when visually recognized from the player side. By being provided so as to straddle the LED substrate 303, which is an electronic component, the LED substrate 303 becomes inconspicuous. Therefore, even electronic components such as the LED substrate 303, which should not be shown to the player from the viewpoint of appearance and design, can be provided on the front side which can be seen from the player side, so that the degree of freedom in design is high. Can be enhanced.

(Variable winning ball unit 700)
Next, the variable winning ball unit 700 will be briefly described with reference to FIGS. 10-13. 10-13 are a front view showing a variable winning ball unit in FIG. 10-13, and a sectional view taken along line FF in FIG. 10B.

As shown in FIG. 10-13, the variable winning ball unit 700 has a base member 701 attached to the board surface plate 200 from the front side and a cover member 702 provided on the front side of the base member 701, and the variable winning ball unit 700. The device 6B and the special variable winning ball device 7 are integrally provided as a unit.

A special variable winning ball device 7 is provided in the upper right of the variable winning ball unit 700, and a variable winning ball device 6B is provided in the lower left, and the base plate 701A of the base member 701 and the cover plate 702A of the cover member 702 are provided. Between, the game ball path 705A in which the game ball (game ball P) can enter the large winning opening of the special variable winning ball device 7, and the game ball (game ball) in the second starting winning opening of the variable winning ball device 6B. A game ball path 705B through which P) can enter is provided. Further, below the special variable winning ball device 7, an LED substrate 703 provided with a plurality of effect LEDs 704 capable of irradiating light toward the front is provided.

The base member 701 and the cover member 702 are made of a translucent synthetic resin material. Therefore, it is possible to visually recognize the game ball passing through the game ball paths 705A and 705B through the cover plate 702A from the player side.

(1st production unit 300 and variable winning ball unit 700)
Next, the first effect unit 300 and the variable winning ball unit 700 will be described with reference to FIGS. 10-14 to 10-16. 10-14 are cross-sectional views showing the main parts of the first effect unit, and (C) and (D) are cross-sectional views showing the main parts of the variable winning ball unit. FIG. 10-15 is a diagram for comparing the first effect unit and the variable winning ball unit. FIG. 10-16 is a diagram for explaining similar colors.

First, as shown in FIG. 10-3, the first effect unit 300 and the variable winning ball unit 700 are arranged side by side at the lower position of the image display device 5, and when visually recognized from the player side, the first effect unit 300 and the variable winning ball unit 700 are arranged side by side. 1 The right end of the effect unit 300 is provided so as to overlap or be close to the left end of the variable winning ball unit 700. Further, as shown in FIGS. 10-4 and 10-13 (B), the front portion of the variable winning ball unit 700 is arranged on the front side of the board surface plate 200, while the first effect unit 300 is the board surface plate 200. It is located on the back side of.

As shown in FIGS. 10-14 (A) and 10-14 (B), the front-rear dimension L1A, which is the plate thickness dimension of the cover member 302 in the first translucent portion 321 of the first effect unit 300, is the second translucent portions 322A, 322B. It is made longer than the front-rear dimension L1B, which is the plate thickness dimension of the cover member 302 in (L1A> L1B).

In the first light-transmitting portion 321 of the cover member 302, among the light entering from the front in the direction (T direction) orthogonal to the front surface of the first light-transmitting portion 321, the transmittance of the light transmitted in the T direction is XA. %. Further, in the second transmissive portions 322A and 322B of the cover member 302, the light that has entered from the front in the direction (T direction) orthogonal to the front surface of the second transmissive portions 322A and 322B is transmitted in the T direction. The light transmittance is XB%. That is, not all (100%) of the light that has entered the first translucent portion 321 and the second transmissive portions 322A and 322B from the front is transmitted in the T direction, and some of the light is reflected in the front surface. , It is emitted in a direction different from the T direction (so as to spread around) at the rear. In particular, the second translucent portions 322A and 322B have a light diffusing portion 322C formed of uneven portions on the back surface, so that light is more easily transmitted in a direction different from the T direction than the first transmissive portion 321. , The transmittance of light in the T direction is lower than the transmittance of the first translucent portion 321 (transparency is low. XA%> XB%).

As shown in FIGS. 10-14 (C) and 10-14 (D), in the cover plate 702A, among the light entering from the front in the direction orthogonal to the front surface (T direction), the transmittance of the light transmitted in the T direction is Y. %. Here, the front-rear dimension L2 of the cover plate 702A is shorter than the front-rear dimensions L1A and L1B of the first translucent portion 321 and the second translucent portions 322A and 322B of the cover member 302 (L2 <L1A, L2 <L1B), the light incident from the front is guided in the T direction inside and is hard to be diffused to the surroundings until it is emitted from the back, and there is no light diffusing part like the second transmissive parts 322A and 322B. Since it is a flat plate, the light transmittance of the cover plate 702A in the T direction is higher than the light transmittance of the cover member 302 in the T direction (Y%> XA%, Y%> XB%).

In other words, since the translucency of the cover member 302 is lower than the translucency of the cover plate 702A, a predetermined portion (for example, a game) on the back surface side of the cover plate 702A is passed through the cover plate 702A from the player side. A person who visually recognizes a predetermined portion (for example, the first effect LED 304 or the LED substrate 303) on the back surface side of the cover member 302 through the cover member 302 from the player side, rather than visually recognizing the ball P). However, since the visibility is low, the LED substrate 303 including the first effect LED 304, which is an electronic component, becomes inconspicuous.

As shown in FIG. 10-15, in the first effect unit 300, the LED substrate 303 including the first effect LED 304, which is an electronic component, and the base member 301 arranged around the LED substrate 303 have the same color (black). , The LED substrate 303 is less noticeable. Further, the front-rear dimensions L1A and L1B of the cover member 302 of the first production unit 300 are longer than the front-rear dimensions L2 of the cover plate 702A of the variable winning ball unit 700 (L1A, L1B> L2), and the first production unit. The light transmittance (XA%, XA%) of the cover member 302 of the 300 in the T direction is lower than the light transmittance (Y%) of the cover member 702 of the variable winning ball unit 700 in the T direction. (Y%> XA%, Y%> XB%), the LED substrate 303 is less noticeable.

Therefore, when the first effect unit 300 and the variable winning ball unit 700 provided at a position (right side) different from the first effect unit 300 are visually recognized from the player side, the cover member 702 is transparent. Since the visibility when the LED substrate 303 is visually recognized through the cover member 302 is lower than the visibility when the game ball P is visually recognized, the variable winning ball unit 700 located in the vicinity of the first effect unit 300. The LED substrate 303 arranged on the back side of the cover member 302, which is a translucent member, becomes more difficult to see. Further, the cover member 302 is arranged on the back side of the cover plate 702A, and the base member 301 and the LED substrate 303 are dark black, so that the LED substrate 303 becomes less noticeable.

Further, in the feature portion 75SG of the present embodiment, an embodiment in which the LED substrate 303, which is an electronic component, and the base member 301, which is a specific member arranged around the LED substrate 303, are of the same color (black) is illustrated, but the present invention has been illustrated. The color is not limited to this, and the electronic component and the specific member may not be the same color, and may be, for example, similar colors or similar colors.

Color has three attributes: hue (hue), lightness (brightness), and saturation (vividness). "Similar colors" are 1. 2. A combination of colors (adjacent colors) that have the same tone (hue group with the same brightness (brightness) and saturation (vividness)) but are adjacent to each other in hue. 2. A combination of different tones but the same hue. Includes color combinations that differ only in lightness or saturation.

Here, an example of the above "1. Combination of colors having the same tone (hue group having the same brightness (brightness) and saturation (vividness)) but adjacent colors on the hue (adjacent colors)" is shown in FIG. 10-16. To explain based on this, when cyan (C), magenta (M), and yellow (Y), which are the three primary colors of the colorants, are arranged at an angle interval of 120 degrees in a predetermined number of hue circles (24 colors in this case). Each of the three colors is non-similar to each other. Colors having a hue difference in the range of 30 to 60 degrees in the angle of the color wheel are "similar colors" and are not limited to a combination of adjacent colors adjacent to each other on the color wheel.

For example, when cyan (C) is used as a reference color, colors belonging to the range of 30 degrees on the magenta (M) side and 30 degrees on the yellow (Y) side (60 degrees in total) are similar to cyan (C). When magenta (M) is used as the reference color, colors belonging to the range of 30 degrees on the cyan (C) side and 30 degrees on the yellow (Y) side (60 degrees in total) are similar colors to magenta (M), and yellow (M). When Y) is used as the reference color, the color belonging to the range of 30 degrees on the cyan (C) side and 30 degrees on the magenta (M) side (60 degrees in total) is a similar color of yellow (Y). Therefore, even when the number of colors in the color wheel is less than 24 colors or 24 colors or more, a combination of colors having a hue difference in the range of 30 to 60 degrees in terms of the angle of the color wheel may be regarded as "similar colors".

In addition, similar colors include warm colors such as red and yellow, which are chromatic colors that make you feel warm, and cool colors such as blue and purple, which are chromatic colors that make you feel cold. It is preferable to include a combination of colors contained in a neutral color which is a chromatic color located between warm colors and cold colors.

(2nd production unit 400)
Next, the second effect unit 400 will be described with reference to FIGS. 10-17 to 10-19. 10-17 is a front view showing the second effect unit in FIG. 10-17, and FIG. 10-17 is a front view showing the second effect unit in a state where the cover member is removed. 10-18 is a sectional view taken along the line GG of FIG. 10-17 (A), and FIG. 10B is a sectional view taken along the line HH of FIG. 10-17 (A). 10-19 is a diagram for explaining the boundary between the base member and the LED substrate, and FIG. 10-19 is a diagram showing the configuration of the second effect unit.

As shown in FIGS. 10-17 and 10-18, the second effect unit 400 includes a base member 401, a cover member 402 arranged so as to cover the front surface side of the base member 401, and the front surface of the base member 401. It is mainly composed of an LED substrate 403 attached to the LED substrate 403 and an inner lens 405 arranged on the front side of the LED substrate 403. As shown in FIG. 10-3, on the right side of the light guide plate 501, the pachinko gaming machine 75SG001 The glass window 50a and the light guide plate 501 are visibly provided in front of the pachinko machine, that is, from the player side facing the pachinko gaming machine 75SG001.

The base member 401 is formed of a non-translucent synthetic resin material in a substantially half-moon shape when viewed from the front, and its surfaces (front-rear surface and peripheral surface) are white.

The LED substrate 403 has a substantially quadrangular shape in front view, and is attached to the front end of a boss projecting from the front surface of the base member 401. A plurality of second effect LEDs 404A and 404B and other electronic components (not shown) are mounted on the front surface of the LED substrate 403. Further, on the back surface of the LED substrate 403, a plurality of second effect LEDs 404C capable of irradiating light upward, a plurality of second effect LED 404D capable of irradiating light downward, and other electronic components (illustrated). (Omitted) is installed. The second effect LEDs 404A to 404D are angle-type LEDs capable of irradiating light in parallel or substantially parallel to the mounting surface of the LED substrate 403. Further, the surface of the LED substrate 403 (insulating portion excluding the printed wiring on the front surface and the back surface) is white.

The inner lens 405 is made of a translucent synthetic resin material, is formed in substantially the same shape as the LED substrate 403, and is arranged along the upper side of the front surface of the LED substrate 403 with a plurality of second effect LEDs 404A. It is arranged between a plurality of second effect LEDs 404B arranged along the lower side of the front surface of the LED substrate 403, and light from the second effect LED 404A is incident on the front end surface, and the light from the second effect LED 404B is incident on the front end surface. Light is incident on the rear end face.

As shown in FIG. 10-18 (A), on the back surface of the inner lens 405, the light incident from the second effect LEDs 404A and 404B is reflected forward by the reflecting portion 406 for reflecting the light incident forward. It is emitted forward substantially evenly from the entire front surface of the inner lens 405. Since the front surface of the inner lens 405 is a flat surface, it emits surface light like a light guide plate.

The reflecting portion 406 is formed in a concave-convex state (rough surface) in which the cross-sectional view of the light guided through the inside of the inner lens 405 in the traveling direction forms a substantially triangular wave shape with a constant pitch. Specifically, it is configured by a molding method in which an uneven portion is formed on the back surface of the inner lens 405 by a stamper or injection. For example, a silk printing method in which reflective dots are printed on an acrylic plate with white ink, or an acrylic plate and reflection. The reflective portion may be formed by a sticking dot method in which a plate is attached with a dot-shaped adhesive material, a grooving method, or the like.

The cover member 402 has a box shape whose back surface is opened by a translucent (transparent) synthetic resin material, and is formed so as to cover the front side of the base member 401 and the LED substrate 403. At a position on the front surface of the cover member 402 corresponding to the LED substrate 403, a convex portion 410 having a slightly enlarged shape of the LED substrate 403 when viewed from the front is projected forward.

On the front surface of the convex portion 410, a decorative portion 420 composed of the letter "V" (logotype) is printed with a transparent colored paint or a transparent sheet on which the letters are printed is attached. As a result, it is provided so that light can be transmitted. Further, a light diffusing portion 402A formed of an uneven portion is formed on the back surface of the convex portion 410 so that the light from the inner lens 405 can be diffused and emitted forward.

In the upper region of the convex portion 410 on the back surface of the cover member 402, a plurality of convex strip portions 421A projecting to the back surface side are extended in the vertical direction at positions corresponding to the respective second effect LEDs 404C. Further, in the lower region of the convex portion 410 on the back surface of the cover member 402, a plurality of convex strip portions 421B projecting to the back surface side are extended in the vertical direction at positions corresponding to the respective second effect LEDs 404D. A light diffusing portion made of uneven portions may also be formed on the back surface of the cover member 402 where the convex portions 421A and 421B are not formed. Further, the cover member 402 is formed so as to incline rearward from the convex portion 410 toward the upper side and the lower side.

In the plurality of convex portions 421A and 421B, uneven portions are continuously formed on the rear end surfaces, and step portions 421C are formed at intermediate positions in the longitudinal direction, so that the convex portions 410 are directed upward and downward. By extending the light so as to incline to the rear side, the light emitted upward and downward from the second effect LEDs 404C and 404D can be received from these uneven portions and the stepped portion 421C, and also enters. The emitted light is diffused by the uneven portion and emitted forward.

In this way, in the second effect unit 400, when the second effect LEDs 404A and 404B emit light, the light emitted from the second effect LEDs 404A and 404B forward by the inner lens 405 is projected by the cover member 402. By being incident on the region corresponding to the portion 410, the entire front surface of the convex portion 410 including the decorative portion 420 emits surface light.

As shown in FIG. 10-19 (A), the LED substrate 403 as an electronic component having the second effect LEDs 404A to 404D is arranged on the front side of the base member 401, and the front side thereof is formed by the cover member 402. It is covered. However, since the cover member 402 is made of a translucent synthetic resin material, it is assumed that the light diffusing portion is formed on the cover member 402 in a portion other than the convex portions 421A and 421B from the player side. However, it is possible to visually recognize the front surface of the base member 401 and the LED substrate 403 through the portions other than the convex portions 421A and 421B.

Here, as shown in FIG. 10-19 (B), by arranging the same white base member 401 around (periphery) the white LED substrate 403, the LED substrate 403 and the surrounding base member 401 Assimilated, the boundary portion BD between the LED substrate 403 and the cover member 402 becomes difficult to understand. That is, it becomes difficult to understand that the LED substrate 403 is provided on a part of the front surface of the base member 401, so that the LED substrate 403, which is an electronic component, becomes inconspicuous.

Further, as shown in FIG. 10-19 (A), the decorative portion 420 provided on the front surface of the convex portion 410 is a boundary between the LED substrate 403, which is an electronic component, and the base member 401 when visually recognized from the player side. It is provided at a position corresponding to a part of the upper side and the lower side in the portion BD. That is, since a part of the decorative portion 420 is arranged so as to hang (overlap) a part of the boundary portion BD on the front side of the boundary portion BD, a part of the boundary portion BD is arranged by the decorative portion 420. By making it difficult to see, the LED substrate 403 becomes inconspicuous. Therefore, even electronic components such as the LED board 403, which should not be shown to the player from the viewpoint of appearance and design, can be provided on the front side which can be seen from the player side, so that the degree of freedom in design is high. Can be enhanced.

Further, the decorative portion 420 is provided so that the area covering (overlapping) the front side of the boundary portion BD is larger than that of the decorative pattern 331 described above, and the boundary portion BD is made difficult to see, so that the LED substrate 403 Is inconspicuous.

In the present embodiment, the decorative portion 420 partially hangs (overlaps) at positions corresponding to a part of the upper side and the lower side of the boundary portion BD when visually recognized from the player side. The present invention is not limited to this, and the decorative portion 420 may be arranged at a position corresponding to all the portions of the boundary portion BD. It is preferable that the boundary portion BD is provided so as to overlap with about 1/3 or more.

Further, since the letter "V" is displayed as the logotype on the decorative portion 420, it becomes difficult for the player to pay attention to the logotype and be aware of the boundary portion BD between the LED substrate 403 and the base member 401. Therefore, the LED substrate 403 becomes inconspicuous.

In the present embodiment, a form in which the letter "V" indicating a big hit is applied as a logotype is illustrated, but the present invention is not limited to this, and "big hit", "BONUS", and "RUSH" are used. , A character indicating a variable display result, a character suggesting a big hit such as "heat", "extreme heat", "!!", or a character such as a game machine model name, a title, or a character name appearing. Further, not only characters but also decorations such as characters, symbols, patterns, patterns, and patterns may be displayed as decorations.

Further, the LED substrate 403 has a second effect LED 404A as a light emitting means capable of causing the decorative portion 420 to emit light, so that the decorative portion 420 stands out due to the light emission, so that the player can use the LED substrate 403 and the base member 401. Since it becomes difficult to be aware of the boundary portion BD with the LED substrate 403, the LED substrate 403 becomes inconspicuous.

Further, the LED 404A for the second effect is provided so that the decorative portion 420 can emit surface light through the inner lens 405, so that the decorative portion 420 stands out due to the surface emission, so that the player can make the LED substrate 403. Since it becomes difficult to be aware of the boundary portion BD between the base member 401 and the base member 401, the LED substrate 403 becomes inconspicuous.

Further, in the present embodiment, an embodiment in which the decorative portion 420 is a single decorative portion composed of the letter "V" is illustrated, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the convex portion 410 of the cover member 402 is not limited to this. When a plurality of decorative portions 420 are provided in the area of the cover member 402 and a plurality of predetermined decorative portions (for example, a pattern) having a mode different from that of the decorative portion 420 are provided in an area other than the convex portion 410 of the cover member 402, the plurality of decorations are provided. It is preferable that the number of portions is larger than that of a plurality of predetermined decorative portions. By doing so, the boundary portion BD between the LED substrate 403 and the base member 401 becomes difficult to see due to the plurality of decorative portions, and the number of the boundary portion BD becomes more conspicuous than the plurality of predetermined decorative portions provided in other areas. Therefore, the LED substrate 403 becomes inconspicuous.

In this case, it is sufficient that the plurality of decorative portions and the plurality of predetermined decorative portions have different modes. For example, the predetermined decorative portion may be an enlarged or reduced mode of the decorative portion, and the outer shape, form, and the like. Any one of the color, size, etc. may be different.

Further, the cover member 402 has a convex portion 410 which is a boundary corresponding region corresponding to the boundary portion BD between the LED substrate 403 and the base member 401, and a convex portion 410 which does not correspond to the boundary portion BD between the LED substrate 403 and the base member 401. It has a region other than the convex portion 410, and the translucency of the convex portion 410 may be lower than the translucency of the region other than the convex portion 410. By doing so, it becomes difficult for the player to see the boundary portion BD between the LED substrate 403 and the base member 401 through the convex portion 410, so that the LED substrate 403 becomes inconspicuous.

(3rd production unit 600 and 4th production unit 800)
Next, the third effect unit 600 and the fourth effect unit 800 will be described with reference to FIGS. 10-20 to 10-26. 10-20 is a front view showing a third effect unit and a fourth effect unit in FIG. 10-20. 10-21 is a sectional view taken along the line II of FIG. 10-20 in FIG. 10-20 and a sectional view taken along the line JJ of FIG. 10-20 in FIG. 10-20. 10-22 is a cross-sectional view taken along the line KK of FIG. 10-20. FIG. 10-23 is an explanatory diagram showing a visual state of the third effect unit and the fourth effect unit. FIG. 10-24 is a diagram showing the configurations of the third effect unit and the fourth effect unit. FIG. 10-25 is a diagram showing an effect mode when the third effect unit and the fourth effect unit emit light. 10-26 is a schematic front view showing a state in which the third effect unit is located at the origin position and FIG. 10-26 is a state in which the third effect unit is located at the effect position.

(Third production unit 600)
As shown in FIGS. 10-20, 10-21 (A) and 10-26, the third effect unit 600 is a cover member arranged so as to cover the base member 601 and the front surface side of the base member 601. FIG. 10-26 (A) shows the light emitting effect unit 630 and the light emitting effect unit 630 including the 602, the LED substrate 603 attached to the front surface of the base member 601 and the inner lens 605 arranged on the front surface side of the LED substrate 603. The effect motor 631 (see FIG. 10-2), which is a drive source capable of moving in the vertical direction between the origin position shown in () and the effect position shown in FIG. 10-26 (B), and the effect motor 631. It has a power transmission member 632 for transmitting power to the light emitting effect unit 630, and as shown in FIG. 10-20, in the upper part of the area surrounded by the center decorative frame 51, in front of the pachinko gaming machine 75SG001. That is, it is provided so as to be visible through the glass window 50a and the light guide plate 501 from the player side facing the pachinko gaming machine 75SG001.

The base member 601 is formed of a non-translucent synthetic resin material in a substantially trapezoidal shape in front view, and its surfaces (front-rear surface and peripheral surface) are white.

The LED substrate 603 has a substantially trapezoidal shape in front view, and is attached to the front end of a vertical wall projecting from the front peripheral edge of the base member 601. A plurality of third effect LEDs 604A, 604B and other electronic components (not shown) are mounted on the front surface of the LED substrate 603. The third effect LEDs 604A and 604B are capable of irradiating light toward the front. Further, the surface of the LED substrate 603 (insulating portion excluding the printed wiring on the front surface and the back surface) is white. The cable C connecting the LED board 603 and the effect control board 12 is wired along the power transmission member 632 (see FIGS. 10-26).

The inner lens 605 is made of a translucent synthetic resin material, is formed in substantially the same shape as the LED substrate 603, and has a plurality of third effect LEDs 604A and 604B arranged on the front surface of the LED substrate 603 from the front side. Arranged to cover.

As shown in FIG. 10-21 (A), the light from the third effect LEDs 604A and 604B arranged on the back side of the inner lens 605 is diffused and emitted forward. Since the light diffusing portion 605A composed of the uneven portion is provided, surface light is emitted.

The cover member 602 has a box shape in which the back surface is opened by a (transparent) synthetic resin material having translucency, and is formed so as to cover the front surface side of the base member 601 and the LED substrate 603.

On the front surface of the cover member 602, a decorative portion 620 composed of the characters (logotype) of "XXX" is printed with a colored paint having a translucent color or a translucent sheet on which the characters are printed is attached. As a result, it is provided so that light can be transmitted. Further, a light diffusing portion 602A formed of an uneven portion is formed on the back surface of the cover member 602 so that the light from the inner lens 605 can be diffused and emitted forward.

In the present embodiment, a form in which the character "XXX" indicating a big hit is applied as a logotype is illustrated, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the model name, title, and appearance of the game machine appear. Characters such as a character's name, characters indicating a variable display result such as "big hit", "BONUS", and "RUSH", and characters suggesting a big hit such as "heat", "super heat", and "!!" may be used. Further, not only characters but also decorations such as characters, symbols, patterns, patterns, and patterns may be displayed as decorations.

In this way, in the third effect unit 600, when the third effect LEDs 604A and 604B emit light, the light emitted forward from the third effect LEDs 604A and 604B through the inner lens 605 is further covered with the cover member 602. The entire front surface of the cover member 602 including the decorative portion 620 emits light by being diffused through and emitted forward.

Further, as shown in FIG. 10-20, the plurality of third effect LEDs 604A are arranged along the peripheral edge of the character "XXX" constituting the decorative portion 620, and the plurality of third effect LEDs 604B are decorative. It is arranged at a position that does not correspond to the portion 620. By arranging the plurality of third effect LEDs 604A along the periphery of the characters "XXX" constituting the decorative portion 620 in this way, when the third effect LED 604A emits light, the "XXX" Since the peripheral edge of the character is lit, the shape of the decorative portion 620 can be easily recognized.

Further, the power transmission member 632, which forms a part of the power transmission member that transmits power to the light emitting effect unit 630, is rotatably supported by a rotation axis having one end facing the front-rear direction, and emits light at the other end. Although it is an arm member provided with the effect unit 630, the power transmission member can be changed in various ways, and if the power can be transmitted so that the light emission effect unit 630 can be moved in the vertical direction, a rack gear, a pinion gear, or the like can be used. There may be.

(4th production unit 800)
As shown in FIGS. 10-20 and 10-21 (B), the fourth effect unit 800 includes a base member 801 and a cover member 802 arranged so as to cover the front surface side of the base member 801 and a base member. It is mainly composed of an LED substrate 803 attached to the front surface of the 801 and an inner lens 805 arranged on the front surface side of the LED substrate 803, and as shown in FIG. 10-20, the area surrounded by the guide rail 211. In the upper left, the glass window 50a and the board plate 200 are visibly provided from the front of the pachinko gaming machine 75SG001, that is, from the player side facing the pachinko gaming machine 75SG001.

The base member 801 is formed of a non-translucent synthetic resin material in a box shape having an opening front surface, and a part of the peripheral edge thereof is formed in an arc shape along the guide rail 211. The surfaces (front and rear surfaces and peripheral surfaces) are white.

The LED substrate 803 is formed so as to have a smaller front view shape than the base member 801 and is attached to the front end of a boss (not shown) erected on the front surface of the base member 801. A plurality of fourth effect LEDs 804 and other electronic components (not shown) are mounted on the front surface of the LED substrate 803. The fourth effect LED 804 is an angle type LED capable of irradiating light in parallel or substantially parallel to the mounting surface of the LED substrate 803, and a plurality of the fourth effect LED 804 are arranged along the peripheral edge portion on the front surface of the LED substrate 803. Further, the surface of the LED substrate 803 (insulating portion excluding the printed wiring on the front surface and the back surface) is white.

The inner lens 805 is made of a translucent synthetic resin material, and is placed in a region surrounded by a plurality of fourth effect LEDs 804 on the front surface of the LED substrate 803.

As shown in FIG. 10-21 (B), the back surface of the inner lens 805 is reflected forward by a reflecting unit 806 for reflecting the light incident from the fourth effect LED 804 toward the front. It is emitted forward substantially evenly from the entire front surface of the inner lens 805. Since the front surface of the inner lens 805 is a flat surface, it emits surface light like a light guide plate.

The cover member 802 is formed of a translucent (transparent) synthetic resin material, and is formed so as to cover the front side of the base member 801 and the LED substrate 803. Specifically, the cover member 802 does not cover the front end of the standing wall 801A of the portion of the standing wall erected on the front peripheral edge of the base member 801 along the guide rail 211, and the standing wall 801B other than the portion along the guide rail 211. It covers the front end. Further, a light diffusing portion 802A formed of an uneven portion is formed on the back surface of the cover member 802 so that the light from the inner lens 805 can be diffused and emitted forward.

In this way, in the fourth effect unit 800, when the fourth effect LED 804 emits light, the light emitted forward from the fourth effect LED 804 through the inner lens 805 further passes through the cover member 802. By being diffused and emitted forward, the entire front surface of the cover member 802 emits surface light.

Next, the third effect unit 600 and the fourth effect unit 800 will be described. As shown in FIGS. 10-24, the third effect unit 600 and the fourth effect unit 800 are white, in which the surfaces of the base members 601, 801 and the LED substrates 603 and 803 are the same color, respectively. The front side of the 801 and the LED substrate 603 and 803 is covered with a transparent cover member 602 and 802, and the light emitting effect body that emits light on the front surface when the third effect LED 604A and 604B and the fourth effect LED 804 are turned on. Has been done.

As shown in FIGS. 10-20 and 10-21 (A), the LED substrate 603 as an electronic component having the third effect LEDs 604A and 604B is arranged on the front side of the base member 601 and the front side thereof is covered. It is covered with a member 602. However, since the cover member 602 is made of a translucent synthetic resin material, even if the light diffusing portion 602A is formed on the cover member 602, the cover member 602 can be seen through from the player side. Although it is possible to visually recognize the back side, an inner lens 605 having a light diffusing portion 605A formed on the front and rear surfaces is provided on the back side so as to cover the LED substrate 603 from the front side. Although it is possible to visually recognize the front surface of the LED substrate 603, it is extremely difficult to visually recognize the front surface.

Here, as shown in FIG. 10-21 (A), the vertical wall of the same white base member 601 is arranged around (periphery) the white LED substrate 603, so that the LED substrate 603 is a base member around the white LED substrate 603. Assimilated with 601 it is difficult to understand the boundary portion BD between the LED substrate 603 and the cover member 602. That is, since it is difficult to understand that the LED substrate 603 is provided on the base member 601, the LED substrate 603, which is an electronic component, is less noticeable.

On the other hand, as shown in FIGS. 10-20 and 10-21 (B), the LED substrate 803 as an electronic component having the fourth effect LED 804 is arranged on the front side of the base member 801 and is arranged on the front side thereof. Is covered with a cover member 802. However, since the cover member 802 is made of a translucent synthetic resin material, even if the light diffusing portion 802A is formed on the cover member 802, the cover member 802 can be seen through from the player side. It is possible to visually recognize the front surface of the base member 801 and the LED substrate 803.

Here, as shown in FIG. 10-21 (B), by arranging the same white base member 801 around (periphery) the white LED substrate 803, the LED substrate 803 becomes a base member 801 around the white LED substrate 803. Assimilated, the boundary portion BD between the LED substrate 803 and the cover member 802 becomes difficult to understand. That is, it becomes difficult to understand that the LED substrate 803 is provided on a part of the front surface of the base member 801. Therefore, the LED substrate 803, which is an electronic component, becomes inconspicuous.

However, the fourth effect LED 804 is an angle type LED that injects light from the side end surface of the inner lens 805, and is arranged along the peripheral edge of the LED substrate 803, so that the LED including the fourth effect LED 804 is included. Since the front side of the front peripheral edge of the substrate 803 is not covered with the inner lens 805, and the inner lens 805 has a smaller area where the reflecting portion and the light diffusing portion are formed than the inner lens 605, the player The visibility when the LED substrate 803 including the 4th effect LED 804 is visually recognized through the inner lens 805 from the side is the LED substrate including the 3rd effect LEDs 604A and 604B through the inner lens 605 from the player side. It is higher than the visibility when the 603 is visually recognized. That is, the LED substrate 803 is more conspicuous than the LED substrate 603.

Here, as shown in FIG. 10-24, the light emitting effect unit 630 of the third effect unit 600 is larger than the LED substrate 803 of the fourth effect unit 800 when visually recognized from the player side (see FIG. 10-20). ), And the arrangement position of the front surface in the front-rear direction is in front of the arrangement position of the front surface of the fourth effect unit 800 (on the player side) (see FIGS. 10-22 and 10-23), and further, the fourth While the light emitting mode of the effect unit 800 by the fourth effect LED 804 is surface emission, the light emission mode of the third effect unit 600 by the third effect LEDs 604A and 604B is spotlight (see FIG. 10-25). In FIG. 10-25, the backgrounds of the third effect unit 600 and the fourth effect unit 800 are shown in black for convenience of explaining the light emitting mode.

As described above, the light emitting effect unit 630 of the third effect unit 600 is larger than the LED substrate 803 of the fourth effect unit 800 when visually recognized from the player side, is located close to the player, and emits light with strong light. Therefore, the visibility when visually recognized from the player side is higher than that of the fourth effect unit 800. That is, the third effect unit 600, which is an effect means having higher visibility when viewed from the player side than the fourth effect unit 800, is provided at a position near the fourth effect unit 800. Since the third effect unit 600 is more conspicuously attracting the attention of the player than the four effect unit 800, the LED substrate 803, which is an electronic component of the fourth effect unit 800, is less conspicuous.

In the present embodiment, the light emitting effect unit 630 of the third effect unit 600 is larger than the LED substrate 803 of the fourth effect unit 800 when visually recognized from the player side, and is located close to the player. Although, the present invention is not limited to this, and the third effect is illustrated, although the embodiment configured as an effect means having higher visibility than the LED substrate 803 and the base member 801 by emitting light with strong light is illustrated. The light emitting effect unit 630 of the unit 600 is visible because at least one of the size when viewed from the player side, the position with respect to the player, and the light emitting mode is different from the LED substrate 803 of the fourth effect unit 800. Should be high.

Further, the front surface of the light emitting effect unit 630 of the third effect unit 600 as an effect means may be colored with a color having higher visibility than the surface color of the LED substrate 803, or a decorative part having a color having high visibility may be provided. By using the cover member 602 molded in a color having high visibility, the visibility of the light emitting effect unit 630 may be easily enhanced. Further, the visibility of the light emitting effect unit 630 may be easily enhanced by the light emitting mode (for example, lighting color, lighting mode, brightness, etc.) of the third effect LEDs 604A and 604B.

Further, as the effect means, an embodiment in which the light emitting effect unit 630 of the third effect unit 600, which can emit light by the light emitting means and can be operated by the effect motor 631, is applied has been exemplified, but the present invention is limited thereto. It may be a light emitting means (lamp unit or the like) provided around the fourth effect unit 800 in the game machine frame 3, or an effect means that does not emit light by the light emitting means, or may be a predetermined drive source. It may be an effect unit that does not operate and is fixed at a predetermined position.

Further, as shown in FIG. 10-23, a protruding portion 3A (eaves) projecting forward from the game board 2 and the glass window 50a is formed on the upper front surface of the gaming machine frame 3. The protrusion 3A is formed above the game area Y so as not to obstruct the visual recognition of the game ball passing through the upper part of the game area Y. However, the protrusion 3A greatly protrudes forward, for example, pachinko. When the game machine 75SG001 is installed on the game island of the game field, the area E1 below the protrusion 3A (the area indicated by the halftone dots in the figure) is shaded by the outside light of the game field blocked by the protrusion 3A. It gets dark.

Therefore, since the third effect unit 600 and the fourth effect unit 800 are provided at positions corresponding to the area E1 in the upper part of the game area Y, the LED substrates 603 and 803 are easily mixed with the shadow of the protrusion 3A. So it becomes less noticeable.

Further, above the LED boards 603 and 803, a protruding portion 3A that protrudes toward the player from the LED boards 603 and 803 is provided, and the protruding portion 3A is larger than the LED boards 603 and 803 ( (See FIG. 10-23), the LED substrates 603 and 803 are shadowed by the protruding portion 3A and become inconspicuous.

Further, the LED substrates 603 and 803 and the base members 601, 801 have been exemplified in the form of being white, but the present invention is not limited to this, and these may be dark colors (for example, black), as described above. By doing so, the LED substrates 603 and 803 and the base members 601, 801 are easily mixed with the shadow of the protruding portion 3A, so that they are less noticeable.

In the present embodiment, as a protrusion protruding toward the player above the electronic component and the specific member, a protrusion 3A protruding toward the player above the LED substrates 603 and 803 is applied. Although illustrated, the present invention is not limited to this, and the protruding portion is not limited to the protruding portion projecting from a part of the game machine frame 3, for example, the game board 2 or the game. It may be composed of other gaming devices (for example, a winning ball device) or a directing device provided in the area Y. Further, the protruding portion 3A is not only fixed to the front surface of the gaming machine frame 3, but also operates from the origin position to the protruding position at a predetermined timing, so that the player can move above the electronic parts and the specific member. It may be a protruding portion protruding to the side.

Next, as shown in FIG. 10-26, the light emitting region 506 of the light guide plate 501 is used when the light emitting effect unit 630 and the power transmission member 632 of the third effect unit 600 operating on the back side of the light guide plate 501 move. It is formed so as to overlap with most of the moving region E2 (the region surrounded by the alternate long and short dash line in FIGS. 10-26).

Specifically, the moving area E2 of the light emitting effect unit 630 and the power transmission member 632 is an area in which the light emitting effect unit 630 moves from the origin position to the effect position, and is an area including the origin position and the effect position. When light is incident on the right end surface 501a of the light guide plate 501, the light emitting region 506 is in a state of emitting light, and the display image of the rear image display device 5, the light emitting effect unit 630, and the power transmission member 632 are displayed from the player side. It becomes difficult or invisible to see through 501. That is, the effect control CPU 120 lights the light guide plate LED 502 to emit light in a light emitting region during a moving period in which the light emitting effect unit 630 and the power transmission member 632 are moved from the origin position to the effect position or an effect period located in the effect position. By executing the light emitting effect of causing the 506 to emit light, the light emitting effect unit 630 and the power transmission member 632 become difficult to see or invisible through the light guide plate 501 from the player side, so that the power is transmitted during the moving period and the effect period. It is possible to prevent the cable C (electronic component) or the like provided along the member 632 from being conspicuous.

Further, when the light guide plate LED 502 is turned off and the light emitting effect of the light emitting region 506 is completed after the light emitting effect unit 630 is moved to the effect position, the power transmission member 632, the cable C, and the like can be visually recognized, but the light emitting effect unit By turning on the third effect LEDs 604A and 604B of the 630 to make the light emitting effect unit 630 stand out, the power transmission member 632 and the cable C can be made inconspicuous.

Further, the electronic components (for example, the LED board 603 and the cable C) provided so as to be operable are made visible to the player during the waiting period or the moving period waiting at the origin position. However, it is preferable that the player makes it difficult or invisible from the player side at least during the effect period located at the effect position. By doing so, it is possible to prevent the electronic components from being conspicuous during the production period that the player pays attention to.

Further, the pachinko gaming machine 75SG001 of the feature portion 75SG of the present embodiment is
Electronic components (eg, LED substrates 303, 403, 603, 803) that are visible to the player and
Specific members (for example, base members 301, 401, 601, 801) provided around the electronic component and formed in a color similar to that of the electronic component, and
A translucent member (for example, a cover member 302, 402, 602, 802) which is a translucent member and is provided so that the player can visually see the electronic component and the specific member through the member.
It is characterized by having.
By doing so, even if the electronic components are arranged so as to be visible to the player, the electronic components are less noticeable due to the specific members of the same color, so that the degree of freedom in design can be increased.
It should be noted that the electronic component and the specific member can be changed to any color as long as they have similar colors. Further, as in the above embodiment, the electronic component and the specific member have the same color (for example, black and black, white and white, etc.).

(Explanation of deformation and application of feature 75SG)
The present invention is not limited to the pachinko gaming machine 75SG001 described above, and various modifications and applications are possible without departing from the spirit of the present invention.

For example, in the feature portion 75SG of the above-described embodiment, light emitting diodes such as the first effect LED 304, the second effect LEDs 404A to 404D, the third effect LEDs 604A, 604B, and the fourth effect LED 804 are provided as electronic components. Although the embodiment in which the LED substrates 303, 403, 603, and 803 are applied has been illustrated, the present invention is not limited to this, and the circuit board without the light emitting diode (main substrate 11 not for production, production) Includes control boards 12 and relay boards), electronic components such as sensors, solenoids, motors, connectors, and cables (wiring), and boards and members that fix them.

Further, in the feature portion 75SG of the above-described embodiment, a mode in which base members 301, 401, 601, 801 for arranging LED substrates 303, 403, 603, 803 as electronic components are applied as specific members is illustrated. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and is not limited to a member constituting a part of a unit (device) for arranging or accommodating an electronic component as described above, but is a member provided around the electronic component. If there is, a different member (for example, a member forming a part of another unit, a game board 2 or a game machine frame 3) provided separately from the unit (device) for arranging or accommodating the electronic component. It may be a member that constitutes a part, etc.).

Further, in the feature portion 75SG of the above-described embodiment, a mode in which cover members 302, 402, 602, 802 forming a part of a unit (device) for arranging or accommodating electronic components are applied as a light transmitting member is illustrated. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and is a member having translucency even if it is not a member constituting a part of a unit (device) for arranging or accommodating electronic components as described above. If the member is provided so that the player can see the electronic component and the specific member through the member, a different member (for example, for example) provided separately from the unit (device) for arranging or accommodating the electronic component. It may be a member forming a part of another unit, a member forming a part of a game board 2 or a game machine frame 3, and the like).

Further, in the feature portion 75SG of the embodiment, the embodiment in which the electronic component and the specific member provided around the electronic component have the same color (same color) is illustrated, but the present invention is not limited thereto. However, as long as the electronic component and the specific member provided around the electronic component have the same color as described above, the electronic component and the specific member are not limited to those having the same color.

Further, in the feature portion 75SG of the above-described embodiment, the base members 301, 401, 601, 801 as specific members partially overlap on the back side of the LED substrates 303, 403, 603, 803 as electronic components. Although the embodiment in which the non-overlapping portions are arranged around the LED substrates 303, 403, 603, and 803 is illustrated, the present invention is not limited to this, and the electronic component and the specific member are described from the player side. When visually recognized, they may be arranged side by side at least one of the upper side, the lower side, the left side, and the right side without overlapping a part. Further, if the specific member is arranged and visible around the electronic component when visually recognized from the player side, the electronic component and the specific member are arranged apart from each other in the vertical direction, the horizontal direction, the front-rear direction, and the like. It may have been done.

The specific member provided around the electronic component includes a specific member provided at a position visible from the player side together with the electronic component, and is arranged, for example, within a range of about 5 cm from the electronic component. Specific members may be included.

Further, in the feature portion 75SG of the above-described embodiment, a mode in which a cover member 302, 402, 602, 802 made of a translucent synthetic resin material is applied as a translucent member has been illustrated, and the present invention has been illustrated. The material is not limited as long as it is a translucent member, and the material may be a glass material or the like. Further, as long as the player can see the electronic component and the specific member through the member, the electronic component and the specific member may be transparent or translucent, or may be colored in a predetermined color. Further, the light transmittance does not have to be 100% or a value close to 100%.

Further, in the feature portion 75SG of the above-described embodiment, the cover members 302, 402, 602, 802 as the translucent members are the LED substrates 303, 403, 603, 803 as electronic components by the player through the member. And a form in which a part or the whole area of the base member 301, 401, 601, 801 as a specific member can be visually recognized has been illustrated, but the present invention is not limited to this, and at least a part of the electronic component is the member. If it is provided so as to be visible through the member, the electronic component and the specific member can be visually recognized together even if at least a part of the specific member is not visible through the member. You just have to.

Further, in the feature portion 75SG of the above-described embodiment, the cover members 302, 402, 602, 802 as the translucent members are the LED substrates 303, 403, 603, 803 as electronic components, and the base member 301 as a specific member. Although the embodiment in which the electronic components and the specific members are arranged along the front side of the 401, 601, 801 is illustrated, the present invention is not limited to this, and the electronic components and the specific members are not necessarily arranged along the electronic components and the specific members. It does not have to be. That is, the electronic component or the specific member may be arranged in a state of being obliquely inclined with respect to the translucent member.

Further, in the feature portion 75SG of the above-described embodiment, an embodiment in which the entire surface of the LED substrates 303, 403, 603, 803 and the base members 301, 401, 601, 801 is set to a predetermined color (black or white) is exemplified. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the color of the portion of the electronic component and the specific member that can be seen through the translucent member (for example, the front color of the electronic component and the specific member) is a similar color. If so, the entire surface does not necessarily have to be a similar color. Further, the colors of these electronic parts and the specific member may be colored at the time of molding the member, may be colored by painting or printing after molding, or may be colored by attaching a sticker or the like to a predetermined color. You may be.

Further, in the feature portion 75SG of the above-described embodiment, an embodiment in which the electronic component and the specific member provided around the electronic component have the same color (same color) is illustrated, but the present invention is not limited thereto. Not, for example, predetermined electrons provided so as to be difficult to see or invisible to the player, separately from the LED substrates 303, 403, 603, 803 as electronic components and the base members 301, 401, 601, 801 as specific members. A component (for example, a first start port switch 22A, a second start port switch 22B, a solenoid 81, 82, etc.) and a predetermined member (for example, a first start port switch 22A, a second) provided around the predetermined electronic component. In those provided with a start port switch 22B, a member for fixing the solenoids 81, 82, etc.), predetermined electronic components (for example, the first start port switch 22A, the second start port switch 22B, the solenoids 81, 82, etc.) are , It is preferable that the color is not similar to that of a predetermined member (for example, a member for fixing the first start port switch 22A, the second start port switch 22B, the solenoids 81, 82, etc.).

As described above, the predetermined electronic components such as the first start port switch 22A, the second start port switch 22B, and the solenoids 81 and 82 provided so as to be difficult to see or invisible to the player are in balance with the predetermined members for fixing them. Since a general-purpose product can be used without considering the above, the manufacturing cost can be reduced.

Further, by setting the color of the specific member to be a color having the same hue and having a higher lightness or saturation of the color of the electronic component, the specific member has higher visibility than the electronic component. Electronic components can be made relatively inconspicuous.

Further, by coloring the translucent member with a color similar to that of the electronic component and the specific member, the translucent member is assimilated with the electronic component and the specific member, so that the electronic component can be made less noticeable.

Further, for example, when an electronic component such as a black LED substrate is arranged on the right side of the game board 2, it is provided around the electronic component on the left side of the game board 2 on the opposite side of the image display device 5. By providing the outer rail decoration 212 of the same color or the same color as the electronic component so as to be visible to the player separately from the specific member, the black members are arranged in a well-balanced manner on the left and right sides of the image display device 5. As a result, the player is less likely to feel uncomfortable, so that the electronic components can be made less noticeable. In this way, the electronic component can be made less noticeable by arranging the member having the same color or the same color as the electronic component at a distant position separately from the specific member.

Further, the configuration related to the feature unit 75SG may be appropriately combined with a part or all of the configurations related to the feature unit 91AK, 92AK, 01AK, 02AK and the like. For example, when the effect described by the feature units 91AK, 92AK, 01AK, and 02AK can be executed by the image display device 5, the first effect unit 300 described by the feature unit 75SG provided around the image display device 5 Since the electronic components of the second effect unit 400, the third effect unit 600, and the fourth effect unit 800 are less noticeable, it is possible to make the above effect look suitable.

Specifically, for example, as described with reference to FIGS. 9-9 to 9-11, the normal drawing effect NOR is executed even in a period other than the effect execution period D0 among the plurality of effect execution periods D0 to D4. In this case, it is possible to execute a light emitting effect using the first light emitting member such as the game effect lamp 9 or other decorative LED, and the light emitting effect is executed when the specific drawing effect SPE is executed in the effect execution period D2 or the like. In the case of controlling so as not to be performed, the periphery (for example, the game effect lamp 9) of the electronic component (for example, LED substrate 303, 403, 603, 803) and the specific member (for example, the base member 301, 401, 601, 801) It may be controlled so that the light emitting effect using the second light emitting member provided at a position closer to the above) is not executed (or the amount of light is lower than the amount of light of the game effect lamp 9 or the like). By doing so, when the light emitting effect using the first light emitting member is restricted, the light emitting effect using the second light emitting member is executed, so that the electronic component or the specific member is prevented from becoming conspicuous. it can.

Further, among the second light emitting members provided around the electronic component and the specific member, the decorative portion 420 of the translucent member arranged on the front side of the electronic component and the specific member can be surface-emitted. For a light emitting member such as LED404A that is inconspicuous even if light emission is continued, the amount of light may be maintained (execution is not limited) even when the light emitting effect using the first light emitting member is controlled not to be executed. .. By doing so, it is possible to make the electronic components and specific members inconspicuous without excessively reducing the effect of the effect.

Further, in the above-described embodiment, the pachinko game machine 1,75SG001 is illustrated as an example of the game machine, but the present invention is not limited to this, and for example, a game ball having a predetermined number of balls can be used. The number of rented balls that are circulated inside the game machine and lent out in response to the player's request for rent and the number of prize balls given in response to winning are added, while the number of game balls used in the game The present invention can also be applied to a so-called enclosed gaming machine in which is subtracted and stored. In these enclosed game machines, points and points are given to the player instead of the game ball, and the points and points given are given to the game value.

Further, in the above-described embodiment, a spherical game ball (pachinko ball) has been applied as an example of the game medium, but the present invention is not limited to the spherical game medium, and for example, a non-spherical game such as a medal. It may be a medium.

Further, in the above-described embodiment, the pachinko gaming machine is applied as an example of the gaming machine, but for example, the game can be started by setting a predetermined number of bets for one game using the game value. At the same time, one game is completed by deriving the variable display result to the variable display device capable of variablely displaying a plurality of types of symbols that can be identified by each, and according to the variable display result derived to the variable display device. It can also be applied to slot machines that can generate prizes.

The gaming machine of the present invention can also be applied to an enclosed gaming machine, a slot machine, or the like in which a gaming medium is enclosed and a score is given based on the occurrence of a prize. Further, the game machine capable of playing a game may be at least one that plays a game, and may be a general game machine as well as a pachinko game machine or a slot machine.

75SG001 Pachinko game machine 300 1st production unit 301 Base member 302 Cover member 303 LED board 331 Decorative pattern 400 2nd production unit 401 Base member 402 Cover member 403 LED board 420 Decorative part 600 3rd production unit 800 4th production unit 801 Base Member 802 Cover member 803 LED substrate

Claims (1)

It is a game machine that can play games
Electronic components that are visible to the player and
A specific member provided around the electronic component and formed in a color similar to that of the electronic component,
A translucent member that is provided so that the player can visually see the electronic component and the specific member through the member.
A specific translucent member which is a translucent member and is provided at a position different from that of the translucent member.
With
A gaming machine characterized in that the transmittance of transmitting light that has entered the translucent member in a predetermined direction is lower than the transmittance of transmitting light that has entered the specific translucent member in the predetermined direction.

Images